BMW - 4 Series - Owners Manual - 2013 - 2013

Contents Owner's Manual for Vehicle A-Z The Ultimate Driving Machine THE BMW 4 SERIES COUPE. OWNER'S MANUAL. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 4 Series Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐ tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐ hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or Integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐ chures in the onboard literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive. BMW AG Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 © 2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English VI/13, 07 13 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 226. 6 Notes At a glance 12 16 24 27 Cockpit iDrive Voice activation system Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 178 180 181 190 192 195 196 198 210 216 Refueling Fuel Wheels and tires Engine compartment Engine oil Coolant Maintenance Replacing components Breakdown assistance Care Reference Controls 32 47 57 61 73 89 94 115 120 142 149 157 Mobility Opening and closing Adjusting Transporting children safely Driving Displays Lamps Safety Driving stability control systems Driving comfort Climate control Interior equipment Storage compartments 222 Technical data 226 Everything from A to Z Driving tips 164 Things to remember when driving 167 Loading 170 Saving fuel Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Notes Notes Using this Owner's Manual The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ ular topic is by using the index. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter. Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐ pendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle. User's manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ munication and the short commands of the voice activation system are described in a sep‐ arate user's manual, which is also included with the onboard literature. Additional sources of information Should you have any questions, your service center will be glad to advise you at any time. Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: bmwusa.com. Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the ve‐ hicle. ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐ tion. "..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐ lect individual functions. ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐ tivation system. 6 ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system. Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment. Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rele‐ vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐ mation on a particular part or assembly. Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment is also described and illustrated that is not available in your vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or the countryspecific variants. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. For options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup‐ plementary Owner's Manuals. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illus‐ trations. Status of the Owner's Manual The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con‐ ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Notes Updates made after the editorial deadline Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair methods. alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐ ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkietalkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐ promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information. Maintenance, re‐ placement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part. Therefore, have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐ ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ ately trained personnel. California laws require us to state the following warning: Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐ pendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle. For your own safety Maintenance and repairs If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Parts and Accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐ cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐ chase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐ ously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure op‐ timum performance when installed on your ve‐ hicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship. BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and acces‐ sories not approved by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made by other manufactur‐ ers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its opera‐ tion, or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products ap‐ proved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers. Installation and operation of non-BMW approved accessories such as California Proposition 65 Warning Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐ bile components and parts, including compo‐ nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water. Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ lowing warranties: ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 7 Notes ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ ranty. ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. ▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ ited Warranty. Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con‐ ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de‐ liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ hicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information. Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ ures: ▷ BMW Maintenance system ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in seri‐ ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Data memory Many electronic components on your vehicle are equipped with data memories that tempo‐ rarily or permanently store technical informa‐ tion about the condition of the vehicle, events and faults. This technical information generally documents the state of a component, a mod‐ ule, a system or the environment: ▷ Operating states of system components, fill levels for instance. ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐ tion speed/ vehicle speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration. ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐ tem components, e.g., lights and brakes. ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ tions, e.g., deployment of an airbag, en‐ gagement of stability control systems. ▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature. This data is purely technical in nature and is used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐ mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over routes traveled cannot be created from this data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐ pair services, service processes, warranty claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐ mation can be read out from the event and fault memories by the service personnel, in‐ cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐ nostic tools. You can obtain further information there if it is needed. After a fault is corrected, the information in the fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a continuous basis. When the vehicle is in use, situations are con‐ ceivable in which it might be possible to asso‐ ciate this technical data with individuals if it is combined with other information, e.g., an acci‐ dent report, damage to the vehicle, eye wit‐ ness accounts — possibly with the assistance of an expert. Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐ 8 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Notes cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicle data to be transmitted from the vehicle. Reporting safety defects For US customers Event Data Recorder EDR The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in‐ jury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐ tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐ wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were operating. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened. ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal. ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better under‐ standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ quired during a crash investigation. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐ ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐ formation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐ fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehi‐ cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐ hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 9 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 At a glance These overviews of buttons, switches and displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 At a glance Cockpit Cockpit Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. All around the steering wheel 1 Roller sunblinds 44 2 Power windows 43 5 3 Exterior mirror operation 54 4 Glove compartment on the driver's side 157 Lamps Front fog lamps 92 Driver assistance systems Active Blind Spot Detec‐ tion 111 Parking lamps 89 Low beams 89 Intelligent Safety 102 Lane departure warning 109 12 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Cockpit Automatic headlamp con‐ trol 90 Increase distance 122 Daytime running lights 90 Adaptive Light Control 90 High-beam Assistant 91 Instrument lighting 92 6 At a glance Cruise control rocker switch 127, 121 8 Instrument cluster 73 9 Steering wheel buttons, right Entertainment source Steering column stalk, left Volume Turn signal 66 Voice activation 24 High beams, head‐ lamp flasher 66 Telephone, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication High-beam Assistant 91 Thumbwheel for selection lists 84 Roadside parking lamps 90 10 Steering column stalk, right Windshield wipers 66 Computer 84 7 Rain sensor 67 Steering wheel buttons, left Store speed 126 Clean the windshields and head‐ lamps 68 Resume speed 128 11 Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ ing 127 Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐ terrupting 120 Reduce distance 122 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 62 Auto Start/Stop function 63 12 Horn 13 Steering wheel heating 56 14 Adjust steering wheel 56 15 Unlock hood 191 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 13 At a glance Cockpit All around the center console 1 Headliner 15 9 2 Control Display 16 10 3 Ventilation 147 4 Parking brake 65 PDC Park Distance Control 128 Rearview camera 131 Hazard warning system 210 Parking assistant 137 Surround View 131 Central locking system 35 5 Glove compartment 157 6 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐ nication 7 Climate control 142 8 Controller with buttons 16 14 11 Driving Dynamics Control 117 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol 115 12 Automatic transmission selector lever 69 Manual transmission selector lever 69 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Cockpit At a glance All around the headliner 1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ quest 210 4 Reading lamps 92 2 Glass sunroof, powered 45 5 Interior lamps 92 3 Indicator lamp, front passenger airbag 96 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 15 At a glance iDrive iDrive Vehicle equipment Control Display All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Hints ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care instructions. ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged. Switching off The concept The iDrive combines the functions of a multi‐ tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be operated from a central location. 1. Press the button. 2. "Switch off control display" Using the iDrive during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐ ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other road users, never at‐ tempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀ Controls at a glance Switching on Controls Press the controller again to switch the screen back on. Controller with navigation system Select menu items and create settings. 1. Turn. 1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons and touchpad The buttons can be used to open the me‐ nus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings. 16 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 iDrive 2. Press. 1. Turn. 3. Move in four directions. 2. Press. Buttons on controller Press the but‐ ton Function MENU Open the main menu. RADIO Opens the Radio menu. MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia menu. NAV Opens the Navigation menu. TEL Opens the Telephone menu. BACK Displays the previous panel. OPTION Opens the Options menu. Controller without navigation system At a glance 3. Move in two directions. Buttons on controller Press the but‐ Function ton MENU Open the main menu. Audio Open audio menu last lis‐ tened to, switch between au‐ dio menus. TEL Opens the Telephone menu. Select menu items and create settings. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 17 At a glance iDrive Press the but‐ Function ton BACK Open previous panel. OPTION Opens the Options menu. Operating concept Opening the main menu Press the button. Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings". Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. ▷ Move the controller to the left. The current panel is closed and the previ‐ ous panel is displayed. The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed. ▷ Move the controller to the right. A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐ ous display. The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu. Selecting menu items Menu items shown in white can be selected. 1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted. White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ cate that additional panels can be opened. View of an opened menu When a menu is opened, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: ▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed. ▷ Press the menu button on the controller twice. 2. Press the controller. Opening the Options menu Press the button. The "Options" menu is displayed. 18 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 iDrive At a glance The function is deactivated. Touchpad Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller: Selecting functions Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. Options menu The "Options" menu consists of various areas: ▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen". This area remains unchanged. ▷ Control options for the selected main menu, e.g., for "Radio". ▷ If applicable, further operating options for the selected menu, e.g., "Store station". Changing settings 1. Select a field. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed. 1. "Settings" 2. "Touchpad" 3. Select the desired function. ▷ "Speller": letters and numbers, enter‐ ing. ▷ "Map": operating the interactive map. ▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses. ▷ "Audio feedback": the entered letters and numbers are announced. Entering letters and numbers The entry of the letters requires some practice at the beginning. In the entry, pay attention to the following: ▷ For the entry of large/small letters and numbers, first convert via iDrive to the cor‐ responding Input mode, refer to page 22. ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the Control Display. ▷ Always enter accompanying signs, such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. ▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on the touchpad. Operating the interactive map 3. Press the controller. Activating/deactivating the functions The interactive map in the navigation system can be moved via the touchpad. Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐ vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function. The function is activated. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 19 At a glance iDrive Function Controls Interactive map. Slide in the correspond‐ ing direction. Enlarge/shrink in‐ teractive map. Drag the display inwards or outwards with the fin‐ gers. Display menu. Tap once. 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller. Changing settings Settings on the control display, such as the volume, can be made via the touchpad. To do this slide to the left or right accordingly. 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐ lighted, and then press the controller. Example: setting the clock Setting the clock 1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed. 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐ lighted, and then press the controller. 6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller. 7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller. Status information Status field 3. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date". The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right: ▷ Time. ▷ Current entertainment source. ▷ Sound output, on/off. ▷ Wireless network reception strength. ▷ Telephone status. ▷ Traffic bulletin reception. Status field symbols The symbols are grouped as follows. 20 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 iDrive Radio symbols Symbol At a glance Additional symbols Meaning Symbol Meaning Satellite radio is switched on. Spoken instructions are switched off. Telephone symbols Split screen Symbol Meaning Incoming or outgoing call. Missed call. Wireless network reception strength. Symbol flashes: network search. Wireless network is not available. Bluetooth is switched on. Roaming is active. Text message was received. Check the SIM card. SIM card is blocked. SIM card is missing. Enter the PIN. Entertainment symbols Symbol Meaning CD/DVD player. General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the computer. In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu. Switching the split screen on and off 1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen" Selecting the display 1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller until the split screen is selected. 4. Press the controller or select "Split screen content". 5. Select the desired menu item. Music collection. Gracenote® database. AUX-IN port. USB audio interface/mobile phone audio interface. USB audio interface. Mobile phone audio interface. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 21 At a glance iDrive Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐ tions, phone numbers and entry points into the menu. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. Without navigation system and telephone Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐ tons, refer to user's manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment, Communication. ▷ To display short information: touch the button. ▷ To display detailed information: touch the button for an extended period. Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for approx. five seconds. 2. "OK" Saving a function 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive. 2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds. Running a function Press the button. The function will run immediately. This means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected. Displaying the button assignment Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen. Entering letters and numbers General information 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐ bers. 2. Select additional letters or numbers if needed. 3. "OK": confirm the entry. Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐ tween entering upper and lower case, letters and numbers: Symbol Function Press the controller: delete the let‐ ter or number. Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers. Switching between cases, letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐ tween entering upper and lower case, letters and numbers: 22 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 iDrive Symbol At a glance Function Enter the letters. Enter the numbers. or Move the controller up. Without navigation system Select the symbol. Entry comparison Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically. The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle. ▷ Only those letters are offered during the entry for which data is available. ▷ Destination search: town/city names can be entered using the spelling of language available on the Control Display. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 23 At a glance Voice activation system Voice activation system Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. 2. Wait for the signal. 3. Say the command. The command is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. The concept ▷ Most functions that are displayed on the Control Display can be operated by spoken commands via the voice activation system. The system prompts you to make your en‐ tries. ▷ Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated using the voice activation system. ▷ The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side. ▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation system. Requirements Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ fied. Set the language, refer to page 87. This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐ cates that the voice activation system is active. If no other commands are available, operate the function in this case via iDrive. Terminating the voice activation system Briefly press the button on the steer‐ ing wheel or ›Cancel‹. Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. The available commands depend on which menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. Short commands exist for many functions. Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, can also be selected via the voice activation sys‐ tem. Speak these list entries exactly as they are displayed in the respective list. Having possible commands read aloud You can have the available commands read out loud for you: ›Voice commands‹ For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis‐ played, the commands for the settings are read out loud. 24 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Voice activation system Executing functions using short commands Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands, nearly irrespective of which menu item is currently selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹. List of short commands of the voice activation system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ munication Owner's Manual. Help dialog for the voice activation system Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹ Additional commands for the help dialog: ▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the current operating options and the most im‐ portant commands for them are an‐ nounced. ▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced. At a glance Via short command Playback of the CD can also be started via a short command. 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary. 2. Press the button on the steering wheel. 3. ›C D drive track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4. Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version. In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the announcements from the system are issued in an abbreviated form. On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Speech mode:" Example: playing back a CD 4. Select the setting. Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the controller. 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary. 2. Press the button on the steering wheel. 3. ›Multimedia‹ The medium last played is played back. 4. ›C D‹ Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button while giving an in‐ struction until the desired volume is set. 5. ›C D drive‹ 6. ›Track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed. ▷ The volume is stored for the remote con‐ trol currently in use. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 25 At a glance Voice activation system Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐ tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐ tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐ ment of a telephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 210, in the vicinity of the interior mirror. Environmental conditions ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐ sis, and speed. ▷ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system. ▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐ roof closed to prevent noise interference. ▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking. 26 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Vehicle equipment Select components All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. 1. Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Press the button. 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info". 3. Press the controller. 4. Selecting desired range: ▷ "Quick reference" ▷ "Search by pictures" ▷ "Owner's Manual" The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. The equipment and functions that are in the vehicle are descri‐ bed therein. Components of the integrated Owner's Manual The integrated Owner's Manual consists of three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐ mation or access possibilities. Leafing through the Owner's Manual Quick Reference Guide Turn the controller until the next or previous page is displayed. Located in the Quick Reference is important information for the operation of the vehicle, the operation of basic vehicle functions or for what to do in the event of a flat tire. This information can also be displayed during driving. Search by pictures Information and descriptions based on illustra‐ tions can be searched via search by pictures. This is helpful, for example, if the description of an outfitting package that cannot be named is needed. Page by page with link access Page by page without link access Leaf through the pages directly while skipping the links. Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press the controller to leaf from page to page. Leaf back. Leaf forward. Owner's Manual Information and descriptions can be searched by direct entry of a search term via the index. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 27 At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Context help - Owner's Manual to the temporarily selected function The relevant information can be opened di‐ rectly. Programmable memory buttons General information Opening via the iDrive The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ rectly. To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the options menu: Storing 1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive. 1. Press the button or move the control‐ ler to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: 2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds. Executing Press the button. The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐ mediately. "Display Owner's Manual" Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to switch between the two displays: 1. Press the button or move the control‐ ler to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual. 4. Press the button again to return to the function displayed last. 5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last. To switch back and forth repeatedly between the function displayed last and the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4 and 5. This opens a new panel every time. 28 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 At a glance 29 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience are described here. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Controls Opening and closing Opening and closing Vehicle equipment Integrated key All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Remote control/key Press the button on the back of the remote control, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2. Buttons on the remote control The integrated key fits the following locks: ▷ Driver's door. ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side. The front passenger glove compartment con‐ tains a switch for separately securing the trunk lid, refer to page 39. Replacing the battery 1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Opening the trunk lid 4 Panic mode in alarm system General information The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ trols with keys. Every remote control contains a replaceable battery. 1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control. The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car. Personal Pro‐ file, refer to page 33. 3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐ ment; see arrow 2. Information on the required maintenance is stored in the remote control as well. Service data in the remote control, refer to page 196 32 2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1. 4. Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing upwards. 5. Press the cover closed. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Opening and closing Take the used battery to a recycling center or to your service center. New remote controls You can obtain new remote controls from your service center. Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center. Controls Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the brake. Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the remote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the clutch pedal. Personal Profile Emergency detection of remote control The concept It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following: You can set several of your vehicle's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. ▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐ mote control by external sources. ▷ The settings are automatically saved in the profile currently activated. ▷ Discharged battery in the remote control. ▷ The remote control used is detected when the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro‐ file is called up. ▷ Interference of radio transmission by mo‐ bile devices in close proximity to the re‐ mote control. ▷ Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mo‐ bile devices in the vehicle. A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐ tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine. Starting the engine with emergency detection of the remote control ▷ Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by someone else with another remote control. The individual settings are stored for three Personal Profiles and one guest profile. Transmitting the settings Your personal settings can be taken with you to another vehicle equipped with the Personal Profile function. For more information, contact your service center. The settings are transmitted as follows: ▷ Via the USB interface for data transfer. ▷ BMW Online. Automatic transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the re‐ mote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 33 Controls Opening and closing Profile management Exporting profiles Opening the profiles Most settings of the active profile and the saved contacts can be exported. A different profile can be called up than the one associated with the remote control cur‐ rently in use. This can be helpful for securing and retrieving personal settings, before delivering the vehicle to a workshop for example. 1. "Settings" 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 2. "Profiles" 3. Select a profile. 3. "Export profile" Called up profile is assigned to the remote control being used at the time. 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" Renaming profiles USB interface: "USB device" Using the guest profile 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" The current profile is selected. 3. Open "Options". The guest profile can be used to make individ‐ ual settings without affecting the three Per‐ sonal Profiles. 4. "Rename current profile" This can be useful for drivers who are using the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile. Resetting profiles 1. "Settings" The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values. 2. "Profiles" 1. "Settings" 3. Open "Guest". 2. "Profiles" 4. Create the settings. The current profile is selected. The current profile is selected. Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Reset current profile" Display profile list during start Importing profiles The profile list can be displayed during each start for selecting the desired profile. Existing settings and contacts are overwritten with the imported profile. 1. "Settings" 1. "Settings" 3. Open "Options". 2. "Profiles" 4. "Display user list at startup" 2. "Profiles" 3. "Import profile" 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" USB interface: "USB device" Personal Profile settings The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile. ▷ Collision warning: warning time. ▷ Exterior mirror position. 34 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Opening and closing Controls ▷ CD/Multimedia: audio source listened to last. The system simultaneously engages and re‐ leases the locks on the following: ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle: settings. ▷ Doors. ▷ Driving Dynamics Control: sport program ▷ Trunk lid. ▷ Driver's seat position: automatically re‐ trieved after unlocking. ▷ Fuel filler flap. Operating from the outside ▷ Programmable memory buttons: assign‐ ment. ▷ Via the remote control. ▷ Head-up Display: selection, brightness, position and rotation of the display. ▷ Via the door handles of the driver's and front passenger doors. ▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set‐ ting. The following takes place simultaneously when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re‐ mote control: ▷ Tone: tone settings. ▷ Automatic climate control/Automatic cli‐ mate control with enhanced features: set‐ tings. ▷ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice output on/off. ▷ Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting the signal tone volume. ▷ Radio: stored stations, station listened to last, special settings. ▷ Rearview camera: selection of functions and type of display. ▷ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the theft protection is activated/deacti‐ vated. Theft protection prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock but‐ tons or the door opener. ▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and courtesy lamps are switched on and off. ▷ The alarm system, refer to page 42, is armed or disarmed. Operating from the inside ▷ Side View: selection of the display type. ▷ Language on the Control Display. ▷ Lane departure warning: last setting, on/ off. ▷ Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting, on/off. ▷ Daytime running lights: current setting. ▷ Triple turn signal activation. ▷ Locking the vehicle: after a brief period or after starting to drive. Via the button for the central locking system. If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked. Central locking system If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the central locking system unlocks automatically. The concept The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on. The central locking system becomes active when the driver's door is closed. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 35 Controls Opening and closing Opening and closing: from the outside Using the remote control General information Switching on interior lamps and courtesy lamps Press the button on the remote control with the vehicle locked. Panic mode Take the remote control with you You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation. People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.◀ To switch off the alarm: press any button. Unlocking Opening the trunk lid Press the button on the remote con‐ trol. The vehicle is unlocked. Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy lamps are switched on. You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. Create the settings, refer to page 41. Convenient opening The remote control can be used to simultane‐ ously open the windows and the glass sunroof. Press and hold the button on the re‐ mote control. The windows and the glass sunroof open. Releasing the button stops the motion. Press the button on the remote con‐ trol for at least 3 seconds. Press the button on the remote con‐ trol for approx. 1 second. The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid can only be opened using the remote con‐ trol if the vehicle has been unlocked. Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.◀ The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed. Locking Press the button on the remote control. Malfunction Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐ edge.◀ 36 If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐ locked with the remote control, the battery may be discharged or there may be interfer‐ ence from external sources such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Opening and closing If this occurs, lock or unlock the driver's door at the door lock using the integrated key. For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ erned by the following: FCC ID: Controls Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐ edge.◀ The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the igni‐ tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of the remote control. ▷ LX8766S. ▷ LX8766E. ▷ LX8CAS. Only the driver's door is unlocked or locked via the door lock. ▷ LX8CAS2. ▷ MYTCAS4. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ference, and ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Using the door lock General information Locking the doors and trunk lid together To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once: 1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐ ing the button for the central locking sys‐ tem in the interior. 2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐ senger door. 3. Lock the vehicle. ▷ Lock the driver's door using the integrated key in the door lock, or ▷ Press down the lock button of the front passenger door and close the door from the outside. The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the remote control. Manual operation If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or un‐ lock the vehicle using the integrated key via the door lock on the driver's door. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 37 Controls Opening and closing Opening and closing: from the inside Opening from the outside Locking and unlocking ▷ Press the button on the trunk lid. ▷ Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second. Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the doors and the trunk lid when the front doors are closed, but they are not secured against theft. ▷ With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens with no-touch activation, refer to page 40. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. Opening from the inside Unlocking and opening ▷ Either unlock the doors together using the button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the arm‐ rest or ▷ Pull the door opener twice individually on each door: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. Push the button in the driver's foot‐ well. If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if it is not locked. Closing Trunk lid Opening During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down the lid. Keep the closing path clear Make sure that the closing path of the trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐ sult.◀ 38 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Opening and closing Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.◀ Locking separately The trunk lid can be locked separately with the switch in the front passenger glove compart‐ ment. ▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1. ▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐ row 2. Controls Comfort Access The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐ ing the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote con‐ trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment. Comfort Access supports the following func‐ tions: ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. ▷ Convenient closing. ▷ Unlocking of the trunk lid separately. Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from the central locking system. If the glove compartment on the front passen‐ ger side is locked, the trunk lid cannot be opened. ▷ Open trunk lid with no-touch activation. ▷ Start the engine. Functional requirements ▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐ ence nearby. This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked using valet service. The infrared remote con‐ trol can be handed out without the key. ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle. Emergency unlocking ▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐ mote control is inside the vehicle. ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds. Comparison with ordinary remote control The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons of the remote control or Comfort Access. Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The trunk lid unlocks. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 39 Controls Opening and closing Unlocking Monitor the closing process Monitor the closing process to ensure that no one becomes trapped.◀ Unlocking the trunk lid separately This corresponds to pressing the ton on the remote control. but‐ Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front passenger door completely, arrow 1. This corresponds to pressing the on the remote control. button Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.◀ Opening trunk lid with no-touch activation Locking With Comfort Access, the trunk lid can be opened with no-touch activation using the re‐ mote control you are carrying. A sensor detects a directed foot motion in the center of the area at the rear of the car and the trunk lid opens. Foot movement to be carried out Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing the on the remote control. button To save battery power, ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and/or power con‐ sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐ hicle. Do not touch vehicle With the foot motion, make sure there is steady stance and do not touch the vehicle; otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from hot exhaust system parts.◀ 1. Position in the center behind the vehicle. 2. Move foot in the direction of travel under‐ neath the bumper and immediately back. Convenient closing Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with the finger and hold it down. In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof are closed. 40 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Opening and closing Opening Controls ▷ "Driver's door only" The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐ tem flashes. Preventing inadvertent opening In situations where the trunk lid should is not to be opened with no-touch activation, en‐ sure that the remote control is located beyond the range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m from the rear of the car. Otherwise, the trunk lid may be opened inad‐ vertently, for example by an unintentional or misinterpreted movement of the foot.◀ Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ locks the entire vehicle. ▷ "All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped or the country-specific variant, you can set whether the doors are also unlocked with the button on the remote control. Confirmation signals from the vehicle 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ mation signals. ▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" ▷ "Flash when lock/unlock" Malfunction Comfort Access may not function properly if it experiences interference from external sour‐ ces such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc. Automatic locking In this case, open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use the integrated key in the door lock. 2. "Doors/key" If there is a malfunction, open the trunk lid with the remote control button or with the button on the trunk lid. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. 1. "Settings" 3. Select the desired function: ▷ "Lock if no door opened" The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if a door is not opened. ▷ "Lock after start driving" Adjusting The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away. Unlocking The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" 3. Select symbol or "Unlock button:" 4. Select the desired function: Retrieving the seat and mirror settings The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions used last are stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions are automatically retrieved if this function was activated. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 41 Controls Opening and closing Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used, first make sure that the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or ob‐ jects damaged when the seat is moved back.◀ The adjustment procedure is interrupted: ▷ When a seat position switch is pressed. ▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐ ory is pressed. Activating the setting 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" 3. "Last seat position autom." Alarm system Door lock and armed alarm system The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the igni‐ tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of the remote control. Trunk lid and armed alarm system The trunk lid can be opened even when the alarm system is armed. Press the button on the remote con‐ trol for approx. 1 second. With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens with no-touch activation, refer to page 40. After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and monitored again if the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once. The concept The vehicle alarm system responds to: ▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk lid. ▷ Movements in the vehicle. ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐ tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the car. ▷ Interruptions in battery voltage. The alarm system briefly indicates tampering: In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid can only be opened using the remote con‐ trol if the vehicle was unlocked first. Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation. Press the button on the remote con‐ trol for at least 3 seconds. ▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm. To switch off the alarm: press any button. ▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐ tem. Switching off the alarm ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights. Arming and disarming the alarm system General information ▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐ trol. ▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying the remote control with you, pull on the driver side or front passenger side door handle. When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐ cess at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time. 42 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Opening and closing Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror Controls Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ sor can be switched off together, such as in the following situations: ▷ In automatic car washes. ▷ In duplex garages. ▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at sea or on a trailer. ▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The system is armed. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐ cured. After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐ sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active. ▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ ing: The vehicle has not been tampered with. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered. Tilt alarm sensor Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked. The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ onds and then continues to flash. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again. Power windows General information Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐ jure themselves.◀ The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is towed. Interior motion sensor The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 43 Controls Opening and closing Opening ▷ wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀ Press the switch to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is held. ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ ance point. The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. Convenient opening, refer to page 36, via the remote control. Closing Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is held. ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically. No window accessories Do not install any accessories in the range of movement of the windows; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀ Closing without the pinch protection system Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ For example, if there is an external danger or if ice on the windows prevents a window from closing normally, proceed as follows: 1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. The pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value. 2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protec‐ tion. Pressing the switch stops the motion. Convenient closing, refer to page 40, with Comfort Access. Roller sunblinds Pinch protection system Roller sunblind for rear window If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is inter‐ rupted. General information The window reopens slightly. Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐ tection Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other‐ 44 If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐ blind for the rear window after having activated it a number of times in a row, the system is blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐ ing. Let the system cool. The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot be moved at low interior temperatures. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Opening and closing Extending or retracting roller blind for rear window Press the button. Glass sunroof, powered General information The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐ tion is switched on. Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐ selves.◀ Controls Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor together ▷ Slide switch back to the re‐ sistance point and hold. Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐ sor open together as long as the switch is held down. ▷ Press switch back past the resistance point. The glass sunroof and sliding visor open automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the opening motion. Analogously, the glass sunroof is closed by sliding the switch forward. The sliding visor remains open and can be closed by hand. Convenient operation, refer to page 36, via the remote control. Convenient closing, refer to page 40, with Comfort Access. Comfort position Stops the roof in the comfort position if the roof is not fully open. This reduces wind noise in the passenger compartment. If desired, continue the movement by pressing the switch. Pinch protection system Tilting the glass sunroof Push switch upward briefly. ▷ Closed roof is tilted open. ▷ The opened roof closes until it is in its tilted position. The sliding visor stays com‐ pletely open. If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐ roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or from the tilted position during closing. The glass sunroof opens again slightly. Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐ tection Despite the pinch protection system, check that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be interrupted in Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 45 Controls Opening and closing certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.◀ pleted when the sunroof is completely closed. ▷ The roof closes without pinch protection. Closing from the open position without pinch protection For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐ ceed as follows: 1. Press the switch forward beyond the re‐ sistance point and hold. Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐ opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value. 2. Press the switch forward again beyond the resistance point and hold until the roof closes without pinch protection. Closing from the raised position without pinch protection If there is an external danger, push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it. The roof closes without pinch protection. Initializing after a power failure After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the roof can only be operated to a limited extent. Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running. During the initialization, the roof closes without pinch protection. Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Press the switch up and hold it until the initialization is com‐ plete: ▷ Initialization begins within 15 seconds and is com‐ 46 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Adjusting Controls Adjusting Vehicle equipment Manually adjustable seats All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. At a glance Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. 1 Forward/backward The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: 2 Thigh support 3 Seat tilt ▷ Safety belts, refer to page 51. 4 Backrest width ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 52. 5 Lumbar support ▷ Airbags, refer to page 94. 6 Height 7 Backrest tilt Seats Forward/backward General information Do not adjust the seat while driving Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐ ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.◀ Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear Also on the front passenger side, do not incline the backrest on the front passenger side too far to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of slipping under the safety belt in the event of an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally provided by the belt.◀ Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction. After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐ ward or back slightly to make sure it engages properly. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 47 Controls Adjusting Height Electrically adjustable seats At a glance Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary. Backrest tilt 1 Seat and mirror memory 2 Backrest width 3 Lumbar support 4 Backrest tilt 5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt Note Pull the lever and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary. Seat tilt The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the remote control currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automatically retrieved if the function, refer to page 41, is activated for this purpose. Adjustments in detail 1. Forward/back. Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat engages properly. 48 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Adjusting Controls 2. Height. Thigh support 3. Seat tilt. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support. Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture. ▷ Press the front/rear section of the switch. 4. Backrest tilt. The curvature is increased/ decreased. ▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐ tion of the switch. The curvature is shifted up/ down. Backrest width Change the width of the back‐ rest using the side wings to ad‐ just the lateral support. Entering the rear Note Folding back and locking the backrest Before driving away, fold back and lock the backrests; otherwise, an unexpected seat movement may cause an accident.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 49 Controls Adjusting Manual length adjustment ▷ Press and hold the button until the seat has moved to the de‐ sired position. Releasing the button stops the motion. ▷ Press the button briefly. The seat automatically moves to the end position. Pressing again stops the mo‐ tion. Comfort entry The comfort entry contains a memory function for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐ ment. 1. Pull lever up to the stop. Original position 1. Moving the seat to its original position: 2. Fold backrest forward. 3. Push the seat forward. Original position After getting into the rear, slide the seat back‐ wards and fold the backrest back. ▷ Press and hold the button until the seat has moved to its original position. Releasing the button stops the motion. ▷ Press the button briefly. The seat moves to its original position. Pressing again stops the motion. 2. Folding the backrest back. Front seat heating Electric forward/backward adjustment Comfort entry The comfort entry contains a memory function for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐ ment. 1. Pull lever up to the stop. Switching on Press the button once for each tem‐ perature level. The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐ nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐ cally with the temperature selected last. 2. Fold backrest forward. When ECO PRO, refer to page 171, is acti‐ vated, the heater output is reduced. 3. To change the entry area: 50 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Adjusting Switching off Controls Reduction of restraining effect Press the button longer. The LEDs go out. Safety belts Seats with safety belt Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension across your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the safety belt may be reduced.◀ Buckling the belt The vehicle has four seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt. Number of safety belts Your vehicle has been fitted with four safety belts for the safety of you and your passen‐ gers. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted correctly. Hints Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts. One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀ Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breakable objects, or be pinched.◀ Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle. Unbuckling the belt 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its reel. Safety belt reminder for driver's and passenger's seat The indicator lamp flashes or lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned cor‐ rectly. The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat. Damage to safety belts In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage: Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 51 Controls Adjusting Checking and replacing safety belts Have the work performed only by your service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly.◀ Belt carrier The concept The belt carrier makes it easier to put on the safety belt. General information Pinch protection system Free range of movement of the belt car‐ rier Even with pinch protection, make sure that the range of motion of the belt carrier remains free. Otherwise, an interruption is not guaranteed under certain circumstances.◀ If the belt carrier encounters resistance when extending or retracting, the belt carrier moves back somewhat in the respective opposite di‐ rection and stops in this position. To reactivate the belt carrier, open and close the door or turn the ignition off and on. Head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint After the door is closed and the vehicle key has been detected in the passenger compartment, the belt carrier extends automatically and keeps the safety belt ready to put on, arrow. After the belt is put on, it goes back into the idle position. If the safety belt has not yet been applied, the belt carrier goes back under the following cir‐ cumstances: ▷ Waiting time approx. five minutes. ▷ Opening the respective door. ▷ After a short trip. ▷ Locking the vehicle. If the respective door is closed, the belt carrier is re-activated when the vehicle key has been detected in the interior. 52 A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident. Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury in an accident.◀ Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level. Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting the tilt of the backrest. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Adjusting Controls Adjusting the height 1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as possible. ▷ To raise: pull. ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down. Tilt Three different tilt positions are available. 2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely. Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐ porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐ tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐ able.◀ Seat and mirror memory General information ▷ Forward: pull the top edge of the head re‐ straint forward, arrow 1. ▷ Back: press the button, arrow 2. The head restraint folds as far back as possible. Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question. Two different driver's seat and exterior mirror positions can be stored and retrieved for each remote control. Settings for the backrest width and lumbar support are not stored in memory. Storing 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Set the desired position. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 53 Controls 3. Adjusting Press the button. The LED in the button lights up. 4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED goes out. Mirrors Exterior mirrors At a glance If the M button is pressed accidentally: Press the button again. The LED goes out. Calling up settings Do not retrieve the memory while driving Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel could result in an acci‐ dent.◀ Comfort function 1 Adjusting 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Fold in and out 1. Open the driver's door. General information 2. Switch off the ignition. The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror. 3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2. The corresponding seat position is performed automatically. The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐ ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed. Safety mode 1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐ nition. 2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until the adjustment procedure is com‐ pleted. Calling up of a seat position deactivated After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat positions is deactivated to save battery power. To reactivate calling up of a seat position: ▷ Open and close the door or trunk lid. ▷ Press a button on the remote control. Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.◀ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the mirror setting is stored for the remote control in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐ mote control, the position is automatically re‐ trieved if the setting for this function is active. Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Slide the mirror changeover switch. Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direc‐ tion in which the button is pressed. ▷ Press the Start/Stop button. 54 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Adjusting Controls Saving positions Automatic heating Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 53 Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running. Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, press the edges of the mirror glass. Automatic Curb Monitor When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐ senger side. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when park‐ ing, for example. Automatic dimming feature Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐ med. Photocells are used for control in the In‐ terior rear view mirror, refer to page 55. Interior rearview mirror Reducing the blinding effect Activating 1. Slide the mirror changeover switch to the driver's side mirror position. 2. Engage transmission position R. Deactivating Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐ senger's side mirror position. Fold in and out Press the button. Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror. Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature The concept For example, this is advantageous ▷ In car washes. ▷ In narrow streets. ▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded away manually. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before washing the car in an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.◀ Photocells are used for control: ▷ In the mirror glass. ▷ On the back of the mirror. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 55 Controls Adjusting Functional requirement For proper operation: Switching on/off Press the button. ▷ Keep the photocells clean. ▷ Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Steering wheel General information Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.◀ Adjusting 1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi‐ tion. 3. Fold the lever back. Steering wheel heating 56 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Transporting children safely Controls Transporting children safely Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. The right place for children Note Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.◀ Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat. Transporting children in the rear Only transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint fixing systems pro‐ vided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury in an accident. vated. Automatic deactivation of front passen‐ ger side airbags, refer to page 96. Note Deactivated front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐ straint fixing system.◀ Installing child restraint fixing systems Before mounting Before mounting child restraint fixing systems, ensure that the rear seat backrests are locked. Hints Manufacturer's information for child re‐ straint fixing systems To select, mount and use child restraint fixing systems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐ tective effect can be impaired.◀ Lock the rear seat backrests in position Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used, due to their age, weight and size.◀ Before installing a child restraint system, make sure that the rear seat backrests are locked; otherwise, the protective effect is not guaranteed and there is an increased risk of in‐ jury for the child in the event of an accident.◀ Children on the front passenger seat On the front passenger seat Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ straint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deacti‐ Deactivating airbags After installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 57 Controls Transporting children safely front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐ senger side are deactivated. Child seat security Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐ matically, refer to page 96. Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐ straint fixing system.◀ Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint fixing system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest position to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident. The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be locked against pulling out for mounting the child restraint fixing systems. Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt webbing completely. 2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with the belt. Do not change the seat position and height af‐ ter this. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system. The safety belt is locked. Backrest width Unlocking the safety belt Adjustable backrest width: before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front pas‐ senger seat, open the backrest width com‐ pletely. Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory position. 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐ pletely. Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, the back‐ rest width must be opened completely. Do not change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀ LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil‐ dren. Note Manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fixing systems, observe the operating and safety information from the system manufac‐ turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be reduced.◀ 58 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Transporting children safely Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restr- ained by the internal harnesses. Controls With a through-loading system: Position Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐ chors Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fixing system is resting snugly against the backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered may be reduced.◀ Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐ ing system, pull the belt away from the child restraint fixing system. Without a through-loading system: Position Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐ cated behind the indicated covers. Mounting ISOFIX child restraint fixing systems 1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐ fer to the user's manual of the system. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ erly connected. Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap Note Mounting eyes Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐ cated in the gap between the seat and back‐ rest. Only use the mounting eyes for the up‐ per retaining strap to secure child restraint fix‐ ing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be damaged.◀ Retaining strap guide Retaining strap Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap will not properly secure the child restraint fixing system in the event of an accident.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 59 Controls Transporting children safely 1 Direction of travel 2 Upper retaining strap 3 Head restraint. 4 Rear window shelf 5 Mounting point/eye 6 Hook for upper retaining strap Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Remove the mounting point cover. 2. Raise the head restraint. 3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head restraint. 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the mounting eye. 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down. 6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed. 60 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving Controls Driving Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Start/Stop button The concept Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine. Automatic transmission: The engine starts if the brake is de‐ pressed while pressing the Start/Stop button. Manual transmission: the engine starts if the clutch pedal is depressed when the Start/Stop button is pressed. Ignition on Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop button but do not depress the brake. Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/ Stop button, and do not press on the clutch pedal at the same time. All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of time. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers. The ignition switches off automatically: ▷ When locking the vehicle, even if the low beams are switched on. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. Note If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on. Ignition off Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop button again, but do not depress the brake. Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/ Stop button again, and do not press on the clutch pedal at the same time. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers. Transmission position P with the ignition off When the ignition is switched off, position P is engaged automatically. When in an automatic car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.◀ The ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped: ▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the low beams are activated. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are switched off. ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the low beams are switched off. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 61 Controls Driving ▷ While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if the driver's door is open and the low beams are switched off. When the ignition is switched off, by opening or closing the driver's door or unbuckling the driver's seat belt, the radio ready state remains active. Repeated starting in quick succession Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several times in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, posing a risk of overheating and damage to the cata‐ lytic converter.◀ Activate radio ready state: Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate engine speeds. ▷ When the engine is running: press the Start/Stop button. Manual transmission Some electronic systems/power consumers remain ready for operation. Starting the engine Radio ready state The radio ready state switches off automati‐ cally: ▷ After approx. 8 minutes. ▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐ tral locking system. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐ tral. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐ gine starts. Automatic transmission Starting the engine Starting the engine Hints 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀ Unattended vehicle Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running; doing so poses a risk of danger. Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐ mission in position P or neutral to prevent the vehicle from moving.◀ 62 1. Depress the brake pedal. The ignition is activated automatically for a certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐ gine starts. Engine stop Hints Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ ple, cannot start the engine.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐ erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ hicle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb. ◀ Before driving into a car wash Controls Certain vehicle components may experience additional wear as a result of this system. Automatic mode The Auto Start/Stop function is operational af‐ ter each engine start. This function is activated at speeds faster than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h. Engine stop In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a car wash, heed the information regarding Washing in automatic car washes, refer to page 216. The engine is switched off automatically dur‐ ing a stop under the following conditions: Manual transmission ▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is not pressed. Switching off the engine ▷ The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv‐ er's door is closed. 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Start/Stop button. 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. 3. Set the parking brake. Manual transmission: Automatic transmission: ▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐ tion D. Automatic transmission ▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is stopped. Switching off the engine ▷ The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv‐ er's door is closed. 1. Engage transmission position P with the vehicle stopped. The air volume of the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The engine is switched off. Displays in the instrument cluster The READY display in the tach‐ ometer signals that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready to start the engine automatically. The radio ready state is switched on. 3. Set the parking brake. Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic en‐ gine stop have not been satis‐ fied. The concept The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, e.g., in a traffic congestion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts again automatically for driving off. Note The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations: Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 63 Controls Driving ▷ External temperature too low. ▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ matic climate control is running. ▷ The passenger compartment has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level. ▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐ ature. ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned. ▷ After driving in reverse. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ matic climate control is switched on. The engine can only be started via the Start/ Stop button. Note Even if driving away was not intended, the de‐ activated engine starts up automatically in the following situations: ▷ Excessive warming of the passenger com‐ partment when the cooling function is switched on. ▷ The steering wheel is turned. ▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission position is changed from D to N, R, or M/S. ▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked. ▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission position is changed from P to N, D, R or M/S. ▷ The parking assistant is activated. ▷ The vehicle begins rolling. ▷ Stop-and-go traffic. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ matic climate control is switched on. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ The transmission selector lever is in posi‐ tion N or M/S. ▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. Starting the engine The engine starts automatically under the fol‐ lowing conditions: ▷ Manual transmission: The clutch pedal is pressed. ▷ Automatic transmission: By releasing the brake pedal. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ Excessive cooling of the passenger com‐ partment when the heating is switched on. ▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐ cur, for example, if the brake pedal is de‐ pressed a number of times in succession. Activating/deactivating the system manually Using the button After the engine starts, accelerate as usual. Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met. ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open. ▷ The hood was unlocked. Some indicator lamps light up for varying lengths of time. 64 Press the button. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving ▷ LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is deactivated. Controls The indicator lamp lights up red. The parking brake is set. The engine is started during an automatic engine stop. models The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button. Releasing Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian ▷ LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is activated. Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, e.g., when leaving it. 1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. Transmission position P is engaged auto‐ matically. 2. Set the parking brake. Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. Automatic deactivation In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐ tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐ sons, such as when the driver is detected to be absent. Malfunction The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches of the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked. Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide the lever down. Hints Use while driving If on a rare occasion it is necessary to use the parking brake while driving, do not use excessive force when applying it. When using it, keep the button on the lever depressed. Otherwise, using excessive force when apply‐ ing the parking brake may cause the rear wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.◀ To prevent corrosion and braking control on one side only, lightly apply the parking brake periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions permit. The brake lamps will not light up if the parking brake is engaged. Parking brake Applying The lever automatically engages after being pulled up. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 65 Controls Driving Turn signal, high beams, headlamp flasher High beams, headlamp flasher Turn signal Do not fold in the exterior mirrors Do not fold in the exterior mirror while driving and when the turn signals/warning flashers are working, or else the additional flasher lights in the exterior mirror will no lon‐ ger be in the prescribed position and will be difficult to see.◀ ▷ High beams, arrow 1. ▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2. Using turn signals Washer/wiper system Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To switch off manually, press the lever to the resistance point. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times. The function can be activated or deactivated: 1. "Settings" Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.◀ No wiper operation on dry windshield Do not use the windshield wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.◀ No wiper operation with wipers folded away Do not switch on the wipers if they are folded away, otherwise the hood or the wipers may be damaged.◀ 2. "Lighting" 3. "Triple turn signal" Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash. 66 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving Switching on Controls Intermittent operation or rain sensor The concept Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset. The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐ shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐ ror. Press the wiper levers up. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. Activating/deactivating ▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once. The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary. ▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point. The wipers switch to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary. Switching off and brief wipe Press the button on the wiper lever. The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wip‐ ing operation is started. At temperatures below 32 ℉/0 ℃, a wiping operation is not started. Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash; otherwise, damage could be caused by undesired wiper activation.◀ Press the wiper levers down. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. ▷ Brief wipe: press down once. ▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once. ▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 67 Controls Driving Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor Fold-out position of the wipers Required when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for example. 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. 2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐ shield. 3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐ onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position. Turn the thumbwheel. Clean the windshield, headlamps After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated. Fold the wipers back down Before switching the ignition on, fold the wipers back down to the windshield; other‐ wise, the wipers may become damaged when they are switched on.◀ 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers move to their resting position and are ready for operation. Pull the wiper lever. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ shield and activates the wipers briefly. In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regu‐ lar intervals when the vehicle lights are switched on. Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐ erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; otherwise, you could damage the pump.◀ Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐ cally heated while the ignition is switched on. 68 Washer fluid General information Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable and can cause injury if it is used incorrectly. Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐ tion. Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children. Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐ tainer. United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐ centrate or the equivalent.◀ Controls Manual transmission Shifting Washer fluid reservoir Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀ Shifting into 5th or 6th gear When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad‐ vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could lead to engine damage.◀ Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance needs to be overcome. Automatic transmission with Steptronic Transmission positions All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ ervoir. Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐ centrate and tap water and – if required – with a washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐ turer's recommendations. Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio. Do not add windshield washer concentrate and antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure water; this could damage the wiper system. Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ ferent manufacturers, because otherwise it can result in clogging of the windshield washer nozzles. For the capacity, refer to technical data. D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐ ward gears are available. R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary. N is Neutral Use in automatic car washes, for example. The vehicle can roll. When the ignition is switched off, refer to page 61, position P is engaged automatically. P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked. P is engaged automatically: ▷ After the engine is switched off when the vehicle is in radio ready state, refer to page 62, or when the ignition is switched off, refer to page 61, and when position R or D is engaged. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 69 Controls Driving ▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is en‐ gaged. After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its center position. ▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and transmission position R or D is engaged. Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi‐ tion P of the automatic transmission is en‐ gaged. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll. Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position. Engaging the transmission position ▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐ gaged if the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed. Press unlock button, in order to: ▷ Engage R. ▷ Shift out of P. Engaging P ▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed: shift lock. Depress the brake until you start driving To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.◀ Sport program and manual mode Activating the sport program Engaging D, R and N Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐ rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary. 70 Press button P. Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐ mission position D. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ vated. Controls D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Shift paddles Activating the M/S manual mode 1. Push the selector lever to the left out of transmission position D. 2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster, e.g., M1. Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed. Switching to manual mode ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ward. ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐ wards. Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐ sible if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument cluster, followed by the current gear. Sport automatic transmission: prevent automatic upshifting in M/S manual mode For vehicles with Sport automatic transmis‐ sions, automatic shift operations are not per‐ formed, at maximum engine speed for exam‐ ple, if one of the following conditions is met: The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel. If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode. If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle is not accelerated for a certain time, the sys‐ tem switches back into automatic mode if the selector lever is in transmission position D. ▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle. ▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle. Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐ sible if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument cluster, followed by the current gear. Displays in the instrument cluster The transmission position is dis‐ played, e.g.: P. ▷ DSC deactivated. ▷ TRACTION activated. ▷ SPORT+ activated. In addition, the kickdown is deactivated. Ending the sport program/manual mode Push the selector lever to the right. Sport automatic transmission: launch Control The concept Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on surfaces with good traction. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 71 Controls Driving Hints Component wear Do not use Launch Control too often; otherwise, this may result in premature wear of components due to the high stress placed on the vehicle.◀ Did not use Launch Control during the breakin, refer to page 164, period. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible. Requirements Launch Control is available when the engine is warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving of at least 6 miles/10 km. To start with Launch Control do not steer the steering wheel. Start with launch control While the engine is running: 1. Press button or select with the Driving Dynamics Control Sport+. TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up. 2. Engaging the transmission position S 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake. 4. Press on the accelerator beyond the resist‐ ance point at the full throttle position. A flag symbol appears in the instrument cluster. 5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within 3 seconds, release the brake. Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐ mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes. Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used again. 72 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Displays Controls Displays Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Instrument cluster Overview, instrument cluster 1 Fuel gauge 78 5 Engine oil temperature 78 2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption 80 3 Indicator/warning lamps 76 7 Electronic displays 75 4 Tachometer 78 8 Display/reset miles 79 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 73 Controls Displays Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features 1 Fuel gauge 78 5 Engine oil temperature 78 2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption 80 3 Indicator/warning lamps 76 7 Electronic displays 75 4 Tachometer 78 8 Display/reset miles 79 74 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Displays Controls Electronic displays Overview, instrument cluster 1 Messages, e.g. Check Control 76 Miles/trip miles 79 Time 79 Computer 84 Date 79 2 External temperature 79 Selection lists 84 Transmission display 71 Gear shift indicator 81 3 Status, Driving Dynamics Control 117 Service requirements 80 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 75 Controls Displays Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features 1 Time 79 Navigation display, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ cation. External temperature 79 Date 79 Selection list, e.g., radio 84 2 Energy recovery 80 Transmission display 71 Speed limit detection 82 Current fuel consumption 80 Computer 84 ECO PRO 171 Miles/trip miles 79 3 Messages, e.g. Check Control 76 Service requirements 80 Check Control In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the Control Display. The concept The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems. A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lamps and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. 76 Indicator/warning lamps The indicator and warning lamps in the instru‐ ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐ nations and colors. Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Displays Overview: indicator/warning lamps Symbol Function or system Controls Symbol Function or system Safety belts. Turn signal. Airbag system. Front fog lamps. Steering system. Rear fog lamp. Engine functions. High beams. Parking brake. High-beam Assistant. Brake system. In Canadian models Parking lamps, headlamp control. Active Cruise Control. Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control: collision warning. Speed limit, adjustable. Cruise control. Lane departure warning. DSC Dynamic Stability Control. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Trac‐ tion Control is activated. Tire Pressure Monitor. Parking brake. Brake system. ABS Antilock Brake System. ABS Antilock Brake System in Canadian models. At least one Check Control mes‐ sage is displayed or is stored (sym‐ bol in display). Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐ trol message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps. Supplementary text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of a fault or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. The supplementary text of urgent messages is automatically displayed on the Control Display. Flat Tire Monitor. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 77 Controls Displays Symbols 3. Depending on the Check Control message, the following functions can be selected. 4. Select the text message. ▷ Messages after trip completion "Owner's Manual" Display additional information about the Check Control message in the Integrated Owner's Manual. ▷ Special messages that are displayed during driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off. "Service request" Contact the service partner. ▷ "Check Control" "Roadside Assistance" Fuel gauge The vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary. Contact Roadside Assistance. US models: the arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler Hiding Check Control messages flap is on. Hints on refueling, refer to page 178. Tachometer Press the computer button on the turn signal lever. ▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐ played continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐ eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐ sages are displayed consecutively. These messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐ played again automatically. ▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later. Displaying stored Check Control messages Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐ rupted to protect the engine. Engine oil temperature ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low temperature end. Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds. ▷ Normal operating tempera‐ ture: the pointer is in the middle or in the left half of the temperature display. ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐ perature end. A Check Control message is also displayed. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 78 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Displays Coolant temperature Controls Time If the coolant along with the engine becomes too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. The time is displayed at the bot‐ tom of the instrument cluster. Check the coolant level, refer to page 195. Setting the time and time for‐ mat, refer to page 86. Odometer and trip odometer ▷ Odometer, arrow 1. Date The date is displayed in the computer. ▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. Setting the date and date for‐ mat, refer to page 87. Display/reset miles Press the knob. Range ▷ When the ignition is switched off, the time, the external temperature and the odometer are displayed. After the reserve range is reached: ▷ A Check Control message is displayed briefly. ▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset. External temperature External temperature warning If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal sounds. A Check Control message is displayed. There is the increased danger of ice. ▷ The remaining range is shown on the onboard com‐ puter. ▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such as when cornering quickly, operation of the engine is not always ensured. The Check Control message appears continu‐ ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range of 30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not ensured and damage may occur.◀ Displaying the cruising range Ice on roads Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on roads. Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads, for example, to avoid the in‐ creased risk of an accident.◀ 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Additional indicators" The range is displayed in the instrument clus‐ ter. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 79 Controls Displays Current fuel consumption Instrument cluster Displays the current fuel con‐ sumption. You can check whether you are currently driv‐ ing in an efficient and environ‐ mentally-friendly manner. Instrument cluster with enhanced features The current service requirements can be read out from the remote control by the service specialist. Display Data regarding the service status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐ matically transmitted to your service center before a service due date. Instrument cluster Display in the instrument clus‐ ter. Displays the current fuel con‐ sumption. You can check whether you are currently driv‐ ing in an efficient and environ‐ mentally-friendly manner. Displaying the current fuel consumption Instrument cluster with enhanced features Display in the instrument cluster with expanded scope. 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Additional indicators" The bar display for the current fuel consump‐ tion is displayed in the instrument cluster. Energy recovery The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted to electrical energy while coasting. The vehicle bat‐ tery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be reduced. Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re‐ quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required" Required maintenance procedures and le‐ gally mandated inspections are displayed. Service requirements 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ tion. The concept The driving distance or the time to the next scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly af‐ ter the ignition is switched on. 80 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Displays Symbols Symbols Service history Description No service is currently re‐ quired. The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching. The service deadline has al‐ ready passed. Perform maintenance work at the service cen‐ ter and have them recorded in the vehicle data. The entries are like a service booklet of the documentation of regular maintenance. The entered maintenance work can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. Function is available as soon as a maintenance operation has been entered in the vehicle data. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" "Service required" 3. Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the required inspections. Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set correctly. 1. "Vehicle Info" 4. "Service history" Performed maintenance operations are displayed. 5. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ tion. Symbols 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Controls "Service required" 4. "§ Vehicle inspection" 5. "Date:" 6. Adjust the settings. 7. Confirm. The entered date is stored. Automatic Service Request Data regarding the service status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐ matically transmitted to your service center before a service due date. You can check when your service center was notified. 1. "Vehicle Info" Symbols Description Green: maintenance was per‐ formed on schedule. Yellow: maintenance was per‐ formed late. Maintenance was not per‐ formed. Gear shift indicator The concept The system recommends the most fuel effi‐ cient gear in the current driving situation. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request" Depending on how the vehicle is equipped and the country-specific version of the vehicle, the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the automatic transmission and in the manual transmission. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 81 Controls Displays Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in the instrument cluster. On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the engaged gear is displayed. Manual transmission: displays Symbol Description Fuel efficient gear is engaged. Shift up to fuel efficient gear. Shift down to fuel efficient gear. Shift into neutral. Automatic transmission: displays Example Description symbols for wet road conditions, etc. are also detected and compared with vehicle interior data, such as for the rain sensor, and are dis‐ played depending on the situation. The system takes into account the information stored in the navigation system and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs. No Passing Information No Passing Information in the instrument clus‐ ter displays the beginnings and ends of no passing zones detected by the camera. The system accounts for only the beginnings and ends of No Passing zones marked by signs. No display is shown: ▷ In countries where No Passing zones are primarily identified with road markings. ▷ On routes without signage. ▷ Where there are railroad crossings, high‐ way markings or other situations where no signage is present, but passing would not be permitted. Hints Fuel efficient gear is engaged. Shift into fuel efficient gear. Personal judgment The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. The system assists the driver and does not re‐ place the human eye.◀ Speed limit detection with No Passing Information The concept Speed limit detection Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the shape of a traffic sign to display the currently detected speed limit. The camera at the base of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra 82 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Displays At a glance Controls Speed limit detection can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. Camera No Passing Information ▷ Start of No Passing zone. ▷ End of No Passing zone. ▷ No Passing Information not available. No Passing Information can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rear view mirror clean and clear. System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. Switching on/off ▷ When signs are concealed by objects. 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. 3. "Speed limit information" ▷ When driving toward bright lights. If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be displayed on the info display in the instru‐ ment cluster via the onboard computer. No Passing Information is displayed together with the activated speed limit information. ▷ When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered by a sticker, etc. ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the camera. Display ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect. The following is displayed in the instrument cluster. ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tem. Speed limit detection Current speed limit. ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in the road net‐ work. ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker. ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming. Speed limit detection is not available. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 83 Controls Displays Selection lists in the instrument cluster Activating a list and creating the setting The concept The following can be displayed or operated us‐ ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel and the display in the instru‐ ment cluster: ▷ Current audio source. ▷ Redial on telephone. ▷ Activation of the voice activation system. In addition, programs of the Driving Dynamics Control are displayed. On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list. Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐ ting and confirm it by pressing the thumb‐ wheel. Display Instrument cluster Computer Indication in the info display The information from the on‐ board computer is shown in the info display in the instrument cluster. Instrument cluster with enhanced features Calling up information on the info display Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever. Information is displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster. 84 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Displays Information at a glance Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information on the info display: ▷ Range. ▷ Average fuel consumption. ▷ Current fuel consumption. ▷ Average speed. ▷ Date. ▷ Speed limit detection. ▷ Time of arrival. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. ▷ Distance to destination. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. ▷ Arrow view of navigation system. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. When the arrow view in the Head-up Dis‐ play is inactive. ▷ ECO PRO bonus range. Adjusting the info display You can select what information from the on‐ board computer is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster. Controls If there is only enough fuel left for less than 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display changes. Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for the period during which the engine is running. The average fuel consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the onboard computer. Average speed Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped do not enter into the calculation of the average speed. Resetting average values Press and hold the computer button on the turn signal lever. Distance to destination The distance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐ gation system before the trip is started. The distance to the destination is adopted au‐ tomatically. Time of arrival 2. "Info display" The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is en‐ tered in the navigation system before the trip is started. 3. Select the desired displays. The time must be correctly set. 1. "Settings" Information in detail Speed limit detection Range Description of the speed limit detection, refer to page 82, function. Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km. Speed limit Display of a speed limit which, when reached, should cause a warning to be issued. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 85 Controls Displays The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/5 km/h. Displaying, setting or changing the limit "Automatically reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a standstill. Display on the Control Display 1. "Settings" Display the onboard computer or trip computer on the Control Display. 2. "Speed" 1. "Vehicle Info" 3. "Warning at:" 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" 4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed. 5. Press the controller. Resetting the fuel consumption or speed The speed limit is stored. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Onboard info" Activating/deactivating the limit 3. "Consumpt." or "Speed" 1. "Settings" 4. "Yes" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning" 4. Press the controller. Sport displays Setting your current speed as the limit In the Control Display, the current values for power and torque can be displayed. 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Select current speed" 4. Press the controller. The current vehicle speed is stored as the limit. Trip computer The vehicle features two types of computer. Displaying sport displays in the Control Display 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Sport displays" Settings on the Control Display ▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as often as necessary. Time ▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an overview of the current trip. Setting the time zone Resetting the trip computer 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Time zone" 4. Select the desired time zone. 2. "Trip computer" 3. "Reset": all values are reset. 86 1. "Settings" The time zone is stored. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Displays Setting the time Controls Language 1. "Settings" Setting the language 2. "Time/Date" To set the language on the Control Display: 3. "Time:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed. 1. "Settings" 5. Press the controller. 3. "Language:" 6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐ nutes are displayed. 4. Select the desired language. 7. Press the controller. The time is stored. 2. "Language/Units" The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Setting the voice dialog Setting the time format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer to page 25. Units of measure 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. Setting the units of measure The time format is stored. To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ distance and temperature: Date 1. "Settings" Setting the date 2. "Language/Units" 1. "Settings" 3. Select the desired menu item. 2. "Time/Date" 4. Select the desired unit. 3. "Date:" The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed. 5. Press the controller. 6. Make the necessary settings for the month and year. The date is stored. Brightness Setting the brightness To set the brightness of the Control Display: 1. "Settings" Setting the date format 2. "Control display" 1. "Settings" 3. "Brightness" 2. "Time/Date" 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ ness is set. 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. The date format is stored. 5. Press the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 87 Controls Displays Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ness control may not be clearly visible. Assist system information Display on the Control Display Information on the Assist system can be dis‐ played by activating Assist on the Control Dis‐ play. 1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" 3. "Driver assistance info" 88 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Lamps Controls Lamps Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. At a glance If the driver door is opened with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐ cally switched off at these switch settings. Parking lamps Switch position : the vehicle lamps light up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐ riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐ charged and it would then be impossible to start the engine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to page 90. Low beams with the ignition switched Switch position on: the low beams light up. Welcome lamps When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in position or : the parking and interior lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐ locked. 1 Rear fog lamps 2 Front fog lamps 3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive Light Control, High-beam Assistant, Wel‐ come lamps, Daytime running lights Activating/deactivating 4 Lamps off, daytime running lights 1. "Settings" 5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights 2. "Lighting" 6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam Assistant 3. "Welcome lights" 7 Instrument lighting The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Headlamp courtesy delay feature Parking lamps/low beams, headlamp control General information Switch position: 0, , The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlamp flasher is switched on after the igni‐ tion is switched off. Setting the duration 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 89 Controls Lamps Roadside parking lamps 3. "Pathway lighting:" 4. Set the duration. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Automatic headlamp control : the low beams are Switch position switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun‐ nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. Switching on The low beams always stay on when the fog lamps are switched on. With the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds. Personal responsibility The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ ment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. Switching off For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the lamps manually under these conditions.◀ Adaptive Light Control Daytime running lights With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ ning lights light up in position 0, or . After the ignition is switched off, the parking lamps light up in position . Activating/deactivating In some countries, daytime running lights are compulsory, so it may not be possible to deac‐ tivate the daytime running lights. The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina‐ tion of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ rameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road. In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or when turning, one of the two front fog lamps is switched on as a turning lamp. As a result the inside of the curve is better lighted. Activating Switch position on. 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Daytime running lamps" The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. 90 Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction. with the ignition switched The turning lamps are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Lamps To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐ tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐ er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill. When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp is active. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible. High-beam Assistant The concept When the low beams are switched on, this sys‐ tem automatically switches the high beams on and off or suppresses the light in the areas that blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐ trolled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traf‐ fic situation allows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual. Controls The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐ tomatically brightened or dimmed. The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities. The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐ ment cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams. Depend‐ ing on the version of the system in the vehicle, the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐ ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case, the blue indicator light will stay on. Switching the high beams on and off manually Activating ▷ High beams on, arrow 1. ▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2. The High-beam Assistant can be switched off when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐ vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐ ton on the turn signal lever. System limits The High-beam Assistant can be activated when the low beams are switched on. 1. Turn the light switch to or . 2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, arrow. Personal responsibility The high-beam assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, manually switch off the high beams in situa‐ tions where this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 91 Controls Lamps The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary: ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation. ▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings. If the automatic headlamp control, refer to page 90, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lamps. Instrument lighting Adjusting ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐ sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐ coming traffic on freeways. The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness. ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs. Adjust the brightness using the thumbwheel. ▷ At low speeds. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc. Camera Interior lamps General information The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐ cally. The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐ enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting. The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rear view mirror clean and clear. 1 Interior lamps Fog lamps 2 Reading lamp Front fog lamps Switching the interior lamps on and off The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on. Press the button. Press the button. The green indicator lamp lights up. 92 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Lamps Controls To switch off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. Switch back on: press button. Reading lamps Press the button. Reading lamps are located at the front and rear next to the interior lamps. When the interior lamps are switched off per‐ manently, the reading lamps cannot be switched on. Ambient light Depending on the equipment, the lighting can be adjusted in the interior for some lights. Selecting color scheme 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Ambient:" 4. Select the desired setting. If the color scheme of the line is selected and the welcome lamps are activated, the welcome lamps are displayed in the color of the line when the vehicle is unlocked. Setting the brightness The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐ justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting but also independently of it. 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Brightness:" 4. Adjust the brightness. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 93 Controls Safety Safety Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Airbags 1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbags 3 Head airbag Front airbags Head airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐ quate restraint. In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head. Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact. Side airbags In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area. 94 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Safety Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions. Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags ▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. Controls ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner.◀ Even when all instructions are followed closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations. ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐ gered. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive individuals. ▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐ jects between an airbag and a person. Do not touch the individual components imme‐ diately after the system has been triggered; otherwise, there is the danger of burns. ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. ▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navi‐ gation instruments and mobile phones. ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐ ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered. ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests. ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered. In the case of a malfunction, deactivation and after triggering of the airbags Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by your service center or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explo‐ sives. Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐ tem could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired triggering of the airbag, either of which could result in injury.◀ Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors. Functional readiness of the airbag system When the ignition is switch on, the warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner. ▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system. Airbag system malfunctioning ▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. ▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the ignition is turned on. ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ bag cover panels, cover them or modify them in any way. ▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 95 Controls Safety When there is a malfunction, have the airbag system checked immediately When there is a malfunction, have the airbag system checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk that the system does not function as expected in the event of an accident despite corresponding severity of the accident.◀ Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags The system determines whether the front pas‐ senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐ sistance of the human body. ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle. ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it. ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below. Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags The front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated accordingly. Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front passenger airbags may not function properly.◀ Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐ structions under Children on the front passen‐ ger seat.◀ Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be deacti‐ vated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐ bags lights up. In this case, change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐ bags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags. The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐ tivated or deactivated. ▷ The indicator lamp lights up when a child who is properly seated in a child restraint fix‐ ing system intended for that purpose is detected on the seat or the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not acti‐ vated. ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐ tivated. To make sure that the occupied seat cushion can be evaluated correctly 96 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Safety Detected child seats The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, especially in the child seats that were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated. Controls Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The concept The system monitors tire pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire valves measure the tire pressure and tire tem‐ perature. Strength of the driver's and front passenger airbag Hints The strength with which the driver's and front passenger airbags are triggered depends on the position of the driver's and front passenger seats. Sudden tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in advance.◀ To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a corresponding message appears on the Con‐ trol Display. Calibrating the front seats A corresponding message appears on the Control Display. 1. Move the respective seat forward all the way. 2. Move the respective seat forward again. It moves forward briefly. 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disap‐ pears. If the message continues to be displayed, re‐ peat the calibration. If the message does not disappear after a re‐ peat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible. Unobstructed area of movement Ensure that the area of movement of the seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects.◀ Tire damage due to external factors Pay attention to the other information and indi‐ cations under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 181, as well when using the system. Functional requirements The system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐ ble signaling of tire pressure loss is not en‐ sured. Reset the system again after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly. Status display The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" The status is displayed. Status display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the Control Display. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 97 Controls Safety All wheels green System is active and will issue a warning rela‐ tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire. All wheels are yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires. Wheels, gray The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for this may be: ▷ The system is being reset. ▷ Malfunction. Carry out reset Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. 1. "Vehicle Info" "Perform reset" 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 5. Carry out the reset with "Perform reset". 6. Drive away. The tires are shown in gray and the status is displayed. After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a short period, the tire inflation pressures set are accepted as reference values. The reset is completed automatically during driving. After a successfully completed Reset, the wheels on the Control Display are shown in green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) active" is displayed. 98 Low tire pressure message The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. ▷ No reset was performed for the system. The system therefore issues a warning based on the tire pressures before the last reset. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 188, are la‐ beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall. Do not continue driving without run-flat tires Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.◀ 2. "Vehicle status" 3. The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you drive away again, the reset resumes automati‐ cally. When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if necessary. Actions in the event of a flat tire Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire. Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, it is possible that a reset was not carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In that case, carry out a reset. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Safety If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center. 2. Rectify the flat tire. Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys‐ tem, may damage the TPM wheel elec‐ tronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them replaced if necessary. Run-flat tires Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, it is possible that a reset was not carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In that case, carry out a reset. Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Controls trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc. Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐ duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.◀ Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.◀ Required inflation pressure check message A Check Control message is displayed. Check the tire inflation pressure and carry out a reset of the system. In some cases, a wheel was changed without having carried out a reset. System limits The system does not function properly if a re‐ set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is reported even though the tire inflation pres‐ sures are correct. The tire pressure depends on the temperature of the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g., due to driving or because of the heat of the Sun, the tire inflation pressure increases also. The tire pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again. This behavior may cause a warning to be issued if temperatures fall very sharply. Because the possible driving distance de‐ pends on how the vehicle is used during the Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 99 Controls Safety Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. No flat tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected. Display in the following situations: ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: have the service center check it if neces‐ sary. ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center. ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again. ▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the disturbance, the system auto‐ matically becomes active again. Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐ sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐ sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for 100 proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐ cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐ tor is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐ tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi‐ nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐ sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ function exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replace‐ ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐ erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐ tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. FTM Flat Tire Monitor The concept The system does not measure the actual infla‐ tion pressure in the tires. It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotational speeds of the individual wheels while moving. In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐ sponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire. Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐ wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Safety sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐ tion of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the FTM is active. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)" Controls 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 188, are la‐ beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall. Do not continue driving without run-flat tires Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.◀ The status is displayed. When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ bility Control is switched on if necessary. Initialization System limits The initialization process adopts the set infla‐ tion tire pressures as reference values for the detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Perform reset" Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐ vance.◀ A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. ▷ When the system has not been initialized. 5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset". ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface. 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes. Indication of a flat tire The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. ▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration. ▷ When driving with snow chains. Actions in the event of a flat tire Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire. Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 101 Controls Safety If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center. 2. Rectify the flat tire. Run-flat tires Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance de‐ pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc. 102 Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐ duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.◀ Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.◀ Intelligent Safety The concept Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐ telligent Safety consists of one or more of the following systems, which can help to avoid an imminent collision. These systems are active automatically every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop button: ▷ Collision warning, refer to page 103. ▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 107. Note Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Safety At a glance Button in the vehicle Controls Collision warning with City Braking function The concept The system can help to prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system helps to reduce the collision speed. The system issues a warning if there is immi‐ nent danger of a collision and if so brakes inde‐ pendently. Intelligent Safety button Switching on/off The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ cally active after each engine start via the start/ stop button. Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED goes out. Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED lights up. Settings can be made on the Control Display. Collision warning Depending on how the equipment is equipped, the collision warning system consists of one of the two systems: The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration. The system is controlled via a camera in the base of the mirror. The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. When the vehicle is intentionally brought close to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings. General information The system issues a two-phase warning of a danger of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these warnings may vary depending on the current driving situation. Up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h a braking inter‐ vention occurs when appropriate. Detection range ▷ Collision warning with City Braking func‐ tion, refer to page 103; ▷ Collision warning with braking function, re‐ fer to page 105 Vehicles are observed when they are traveling in the same direction of movement if they are Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 103 Controls Safety located within the detection range of the sys‐ tem. At a glance Symbol Measure The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ ing. Increase braking and distance. Button in the vehicle The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ ing. You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive ma‐ neuver. Braking intervention Switching on automatically The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐ tervene. During the warning, the maximum braking force is used, even with light pressure on the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk of collision, the system can assist with a slight braking intervention. The intervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a complete stop. The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ ton. Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ vention up until reaching a complete stop, the engine may be shut down. Intelligent Safety button Switching on/off Switching off The system is only switched off until the next time the engine is started with the Start/Stop button. Press the button. The LED goes out. Warning with braking function Adapting your speed and driving style The warning does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ Display If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. 104 The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ vated. The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐ ing the steering wheel. When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch off the collision warning with braking function to prevent undesired interventions. System limits Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ ger of an accident occurring.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Safety Controls The system's detection capabilities are limited. Collision warning with braking function This may result in the warning not being is‐ sued or being issued late. The concept Detection range For example, the following situations may not be detected: ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed. ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you or sharply decelerating vehicles. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. ▷ Pedestrians. Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ fall. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are limited or deactivated, for example, DSC OFF. ▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐ sor is dirty or obscured. The system issues a warning if there is immi‐ nent danger of a collision and also includes a braking function. If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is controlled via the cruise control radar sensor in conjunction with a camera. The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. When the vehicle is intentionally brought close to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings. General information The system issues a two-phase warning of a possible danger of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these warnings may vary depending on the current driving situation. Detection range ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. ▷ If there is constant dimming because of oncoming light, for example, from the sun low in the sky. Prewarning sensitivity Depending on the set prewarning time, this may result in increased false warnings. It responds to stationary or moving objects that are within the detection range of the radar system. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 105 Controls Safety At a glance The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐ vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is accompanied by a braking intervention. Button in the vehicle The braking intervention is executed with lim‐ ited braking force and for a brief period only. The intervention can bring the vehicle to a complete stop. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ vated. Intelligent Safety button Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the braking intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure. No automatic delay occurs. Adapting your speed and driving style Switching on/off Switching on automatically The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ ton. Switching off The system is only switched off until the next time the engine is started with the Start/Stop button. The warning does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐ ing the steering wheel. When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch off the collision warning with braking function to prevent undesired interventions. Press the button. Display in the instrument cluster The LED goes out. The collision warning can be issued in the in‐ strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and acoustically. Display Warning stages Prewarning This warning is issued, for example, when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. Acute warning with braking function Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed. 106 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Safety Controls Functional limitations Warning stages The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: Symbol Measure The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ ing. ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ fall. Increase distance. ▷ In tight curves. The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ ing. You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive ma‐ neuver. Adapting your speed and driving style The display does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ ▷ If the driving stability control systems are limited or deactivated, for example, DSC OFF. ▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐ sor is dirty or obscured. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. ▷ If there is constant dimming because of oncoming light, for example, from the sun low in the sky. Prewarning sensitivity Depending on the set prewarning time, this may result in increased false warnings. System limits Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ ger of an accident occurring.◀ The concept Detection range The system can help to prevent accidents with pedestrians. The system's detection capabilities are limited. This may result in the warning not being is‐ sued or being issued late. For example, the following situations may not be detected: ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed. ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you or sharply decelerating vehicles. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. ▷ Pedestrians. Pedestrian warning with city braking function The system issues a warning in the city driving speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐ lision with pedestrians and includes a braking function. The system is controlled via the camera in the base of the interior mirror. General information The system issues a warning with brightness staring at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h regarding a possible risk of collision with pedestrians and assists with a brake intervention shortly before a collision. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 107 Controls Safety It responds to persons that are within the de‐ tection range of the system. Camera Detection range The camera is located near the base of the mirror. The warning area in front of the vehicle is div‐ ided into two areas. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rear view mirror clean and clear. ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle. Switching on/off ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left. Switching on automatically A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐ cated within the central area. A warning is is‐ sued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area. At a glance The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ ton. Switching off Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED goes out. Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED lights up. Button in the vehicle Warning with braking function Adapting your speed and driving style The warning does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ Display Intelligent Safety button If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ nal sounds. 108 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Safety Intervene immediately by braking or making an evasive maneuver. Controls ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour. ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. Braking intervention ▷ Pedestrians below a body size of approx. 32 in/80 cm. The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐ tervene. During the warning, the maximum braking force is used, even with light pressure on the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk of collision, the system can assist with a slight braking intervention. The intervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a complete stop. The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations: Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ vention up until reaching a complete stop, the engine may be shut down. ▷ If the camera view field or the front wind‐ shield are dirty or covered. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ vated. The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐ ing the steering wheel. When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch off the pedestrian warning to prevent undesired interventions. System limits Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ ger of an accident occurring.◀ Detection range The detection capability of the camera is lim‐ ited. This may result in the warning not being is‐ sued or being issued late. Functional limitations ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ fall. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ gine, via the Start/Stop knob. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. Lane departure warning The concept Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts you when the vehicle on streets with lane markings is about to leave the lane. Depending on the country-specific version of the vehicle, the speed is between 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h. If the system is switched on below this speed, a message appears in the in‐ strument cluster. The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in the event of warnings. The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving sit‐ uation. The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane. For example, the following situations may not be detected: ▷ Partially covered pedestrians. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 109 Controls Safety Notes ▷ On: the LED lights up. Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the course of the road and the traffic situation. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐ ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐ cle.◀ At a glance Button in the vehicle ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The state is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Display in the instrument cluster ▷ Lines: system is activated. ▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking was detected and warnings can be issued. Issued warning If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐ brating. If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued. End of warning The warning ends: Lane departure warning ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. ▷ When returning to your own lane. ▷ When braking hard. Camera ▷ When using the turn signal. System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merg‐ ing, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas. The camera is located near the base of the mirror. ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rear view mirror clean and clear. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. Switching on/off ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. Press the button. 110 ▷ When the lane markings are covered by objects. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Safety ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc. Controls At a glance Button in the vehicle ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. Active Blind Spot Detection The concept Active Blind Spot Detection Radar sensors Two radar sensors below the rear bumper monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The system indicates whether there are vehi‐ cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2. The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up dimly. The radar sensors are located under the rear bumper. Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐ uations described above. Switching on/off The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates. Press the button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Notes Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. The system can issue warnings at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h The state is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 111 Controls Safety Display ▷ NBG009014A. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ference, and ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Information stage The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐ cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Brake force display Warning If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes brightly. The concept The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the critical zone. System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. ▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered with stickers. A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional. For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ erned by the following: ▷ During normal brake application, the outer brake lamps light up. ▷ During heavy brake application, the inner brake lamps light up in addition. Active Protection General information The Active Protection safety package consists of systems that are independent of each other: ▷ Attentiveness assistant. ▷ PreCrash ▷ PostCrash FCC ID: 112 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Safety Attentiveness assistant The concept The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐ ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐ notonous journeys, for example, on highways. In this situation, it is recommended that the driver take a break. Controls After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐ mately 45 minutes. System limits The function may be limited in the following situations, for instance, and will either output an incorrect warning or no warning at all: ▷ When the clock is set incorrectly. Note Personal responsibility ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph/70 km/h. The system cannot act as a substitute for the personal assessment of one's physical state and may not detect an increasing lack of alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐ rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐ tected too late and an accident be caused as a result.◀ ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering quickly. Function PreCrash The system is activated each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off. The concept After travel has begun, the system is trained about the driver, so that increasing lack of alertness or fatigue can be detected. This procedure takes the following criteria into account: ▷ Personal driving style, for example, steer‐ ing behavior. ▷ In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently. ▷ When the road surface is poor. ▷ In the event of strong side winds. With this system critical driving situations that might result in an accident can be detected above a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. In these situations, preventative protection measures are automatically undertaken to minimize the risk in the event of an accident as much as possible. Critical driving situations may include: ▷ Driving conditions, for example, length of trip. ▷ Full brake applications. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a recommen‐ dation to take a break. ▷ Severe oversteering. Break recommendation If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Display with the recommendation to take a break. ▷ Severe understeering. If the vehicle includes the collision warning or collision warning with braking feature, impend‐ ing collisions with vehicles driving ahead or stopped in front of you can also be detected within the system's range. A recommendation to take a break is displayed only once during an uninterrupted trip. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 113 Controls Safety Note Personal responsibility The system cannot possibly serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. The system may not al‐ ways detect critical situations reliably and in a timely manner. Adapt speed to traffic situation and drive alertly; otherwise, a risk to safety may result.◀ Function After the safety belt is buckled, the front belts are automatically pretensioned once after the vehicle is driven is away. In critical driving situations, the following indi‐ vidual functions become active as needed: ▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐ sioned. ▷ Automatic closing of the windows. ▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof. After a critical driving situation without an acci‐ dent, the front belts are loosened again. All other systems can be restored to the desired setting. If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐ cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the belt before continuing on your trip. PostCrash In the event of an accident, the system can bring the car to a halt automatically without in‐ tervention by the driver in certain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof. Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve‐ hicle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic braking. Depressing the accelerator pedal also interrupts automatic braking. After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing. 114 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving stability control systems Controls Driving stability control systems Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes at individual wheels. Adjust your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. Antilock Brake System ABS Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner.◀ ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Indicator/warning lamps The vehicle remains steerable even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety. ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ gine. The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ trols the drive forces and brake forces. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has failed. Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost. This then reduces braking dis‐ tance to a minimum during full braking. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS. When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in bends. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible. Deactivating DSC Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking. Press and hold the button, but not lon‐ ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control The DSC system is switched off. Activating DSC The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐ tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub‐ Press the button. DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 115 Controls Driving stability control systems Indicator/warning lamps When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is deactivated. DTC Dynamic Traction Control The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which forward momentum is optimized. The system ensures maximum forward mo‐ mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐ lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐ ited. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐ ate caution. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances: ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads. ▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in deep snow or on loose surfaces. ▷ When driving with snow chains. Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction on loose ground. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends. Activating DTC Deactivating DTC Press the button again. TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐ tor lamp go out. xDrive xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐ hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC further optimize traction and driving dynamics. The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐ tributes the drive forces to the front and rear axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface. Dynamic Damping Control The concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐ tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐ eling on uneven road surfaces. The system enhances driving dynamics and comfort as required for the road surface and driving style. Programs The system offers several different programs. The programs can be selected via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 117. SPORT Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ sorbers for greater driving agility. SPORT+ Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up. Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ sorbers for greater driving agility when driving with limited driving stabilization. COMFORT/ECO PRO Balanced control of the vehicle. 116 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving stability control systems Variable sport steering The variable sport steering increases the steering angle of the front wheels at large steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or when parking. Steering becomes more direct. It also varies the force required to turn the wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed. This results in a sporty steering response. In addition, it becomes easier to steer during parking and maneuvering. Driving Dynamics Control The concept The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to adjust the certain characteristics of the vehicle. Various programs can be selected for this pur‐ pose. The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC OFF buttons can each be used to activate a program. Operating the programs Press the button Program DSC OFF TRACTION SPORT+ Controls DSC OFF When DSC OFF, refer to page 115, is active, driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends. TRACTION When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 116, is activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐ celeration and when driving in bends. SPORT+ Sporty driving with optimized chassis and adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐ bilization. Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. The driver handles several of the stabilization tasks. Activating SPORT+ Press the button repeatedly until SPORT+ appears in the instrument cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up. Automatic program change When activating cruise control, the program automatically switches to SPORT mode. SPORT COMFORT Indicator/warning lamps ECO PRO SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster. Automatic program change The system automatically switches to COM‐ FORT in the following situations: ▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Damping Control. ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. ▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐ TION or DSC OFF mode. The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up: Dynamic Traction Control is activated. SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension and engine control for greater driving agility with maximum driving stabilization. The program can be configured to individual specifications. The configuration is stored for the remote control currently in use. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 117 Controls Driving stability control systems Activating SPORT Press button repeatedly until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster. The program can be configured to individual specifications. Activating ECO PRO Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument Configuring SPORT When the display is activated on the Control Display, refer to page 118, the SPORT driving mode can be set to individual specifications. ▷ Activating SPORT. cluster. Configuring ECO PRO 1. Activate ECO PRO. ▷ "Configure SPORT" ▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode. SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐ vated: 1. "Settings" 2. "Configure ECO PRO" Make the desired settings. Configure driving mode 2. "Driving mode" Settings can be made for the following driving modes in Driving mode: 3. "Configure SPORT" ▷ SPORT mode, refer to page 118. 4. Configure driving mode. ▷ ECO PRO mode, refer to page 172. This configuration is retrieved when the SPORT driving mode is activated. Displays COMFORT Program selection Pressing the button displays a list of the selectable programs. For a balanced tuning with maximum driving stabilization. Activating COMFORT Press button repeatedly until COM‐ FORT is displayed in the instrument cluster. Selected program The selected program is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. In certain situations, the system automatically changes to the NORMAL program, automatic program change, refer to page 117. ECO PRO Display on the Control Display ECO PRO, refer to page 171, provides consis‐ tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐ zation. Program changes can be displayed on the Control Display. Comfort functions and the engine controller are adjusted. 2. "Driving mode" 118 1. "Settings" 3. "Driving mode info" Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving stability control systems Controls Drive-off assistant This system supports driving away on gradi‐ ents. The parking brake is not required. 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive away without delay. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is being used, the vehicle may roll back slightly. Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐ ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 119 Controls Driving comfort Driving comfort Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC The concept This system can be used to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐ cally on clear roads. To the extent possible, the system automati‐ cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you. The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied. For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐ tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead begins moving faster. If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drives away again from a halt, your vehicle is able to accelerate if operated accordingly. Even if some time passes before the vehicle drives away again, the BMW can still be accel‐ erated automatically and simply. As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the desired speed. General information When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is also set to a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. Notes Personal responsibility The system does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her speed, distance and driving style to the traffic condi‐ tions. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic events. Intervene actively when neces‐ sary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger of an accident.◀ At a glance Buttons on the steering wheel Press the button Function System on/off, interrupt, refer to page 121 Store/maintain speed, refer to page 121 Resume speed, refer to page 123 Reduce distance, refer to page 122 Increase distance, refer to page 122 Rocker switch: Change/maintain speed, refer to page 121 The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐ dients, but may not be maintained on uphill slopes if engine power is insufficient. 120 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving comfort The arrangement of the buttons varies accord‐ ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun‐ try-specific variants. Radar sensor A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle. Controls If switching off the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. Press the button. ▷ If active: press twice. ▷ If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed and distance are deleted. Interrupting When active, press the button. If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de‐ tection of vehicles. ▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐ move layers of snow and ice carefully. ▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor. Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel. The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up and the marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. ▷ When the brakes are applied. ▷ When transmission position D is disen‐ gaged. ▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated. ▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability. ▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are opened when the vehicle is standing still. ▷ If the system has not detected objects for an extended period, e.g., on a road with very little traffic without road edge line markings. ▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐ rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog. Maintaining/storing the speed Press the button. Cruise control can be used. Switching off Or: Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or inter‐ rupted, actively intervene by braking, steering and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth‐ erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐ curring.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 121 Controls Driving comfort Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ terrupted. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the instrument cluster, refer to page 123. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. Changing, maintaining, and storing the speed The rocker switch can be pressed while the system is interrupted to maintain and store the current speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐ ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐ erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐ curring.◀ If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action. Distance Selecting a distance Adjust the distance according to the traf‐ fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.◀ Reduce distance Speed differences Large differences in speed relative to ve‐ hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐ sated by the system for example in the follow‐ ing situations: ▷ When catching up rapidly with a truck. ▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves into the wrong lane.◀ 122 Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set. The selected distance, refer to page 123, is displayed in the instrument cluster. Increase distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving comfort The selected distance, refer to page 123, is displayed in the instrument cluster. Calling up the desired speed and distance 2. Release the brake pedal. 3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press the RES button or the rocker switch when the vehicle ahead of you drives away. Displays in the instrument cluster While driving Press the button with the system switched on. In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: ▷ When the system is switched off. ▷ When the ignition is switched off. While standing Before leaving the vehicle, secure it against rolling Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐ mission and apply the parking brake. Other‐ wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀ The system brought the vehicle to a complete standstill. ▷ Green marking in the speedometer: Your vehicle accelerates automatically as soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐ dar sensor moves off. ▷ Marking in the speedometer turns orange: no automatic driving away. To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐ matically, press the accelerator briefly or press the RES or SET button. Rolling bars in the distance display indicate that the vehicle in the radar sensor detection range has moved off. Your vehicle was braked to a halt by pressing on the brake pedal and it is standing behind another vehicle: 1. Controls Press the button to call up a stored desired speed. Desired speed ▷ The marking lights up green: the system is active. ▷ The marking lights up or‐ ange: the system has been interrupted. ▷ The marking does not light up: the system is switched off. Brief status display Selected desired speed. If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ tem requirements for operation are currently not met. Distance to vehicle ahead of you The selected distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you is shown. Distance display Distance 1 Distance 2 Distance 3 Distance 4 This value is set after the system is switched on. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 123 Controls Driving comfort Distance display The system has been interrupted or distance control is deactivated be‐ cause the accelerator is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected. The system can also be activated when sta‐ tionary. Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐ uation when using the system. Detection range Distance control is deactivated be‐ cause the accelerator is being pressed; a vehicle was detected. Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away. Indicator/warning lamps Personal responsibility The indicator and warning lamps do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ The vehicle symbol lights up orange: A vehicle has been detected ahead of you. The vehicle symbol flashes orange: The conditions are not adequate for operating the system. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively assume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator. The vehicle symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive maneuver. The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited. Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you for instance might not be detected. Limited detection capacity Because of the limits to the detection ca‐ pacity of the camera and the sensor, you should be alert at all times so that you can in‐ tervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ Deceleration The system does not decelerate when a sta‐ tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of traffic congestion. The system also does not respond to: ▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road users. System limits ▷ Red traffic lights. Speed range ▷ Cross traffic. Best results are achieved when using the sys‐ tem on well-developed roads and highways. The desired speed can be selected between 20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h. ▷ Oncoming traffic. 124 ▷ Stationary objects. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving comfort Controls Unexpected lane change No warnings A warning may not be issued when ap‐ proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐ stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ Swerving vehicles If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐ cle, you yourself must react, as the system does not react to stopped vehicles. Cornering A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle. Swerving vehicles If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis‐ tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐ hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐ vers, if necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although curves cannot be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. In tight curves, situations may result due to the restricted detection range of the system in which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be detected at all, or not until after a consider‐ able delay. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 125 Controls Driving comfort Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, for example. A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails. When approaching a curve, the system may react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the vehicle by the system can be compensated for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator pedal is released, the system becomes active again and independently controls the speed. Driving away In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or behind bumps in the road. Radar sensor Cruise control The concept The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel. The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐ gine braking action is insufficient. Unfavorable conditions Do not use the system if unfavorable conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐ stant speed, for instance: ▷ On curvy roads. For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ erned by the following: FCC ID: ▷ OAYARS3-A ▷ In heavy traffic. ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on a loose road surface. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐ cle and cause an accident.◀ General information Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is also set to a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ference, and ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. 126 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving comfort Controls ▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not en‐ gaged. At a glance Press the button Controls Function ▷ The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐ rent speed. Interrupt system on/off ▷ The transmission position D is disengaged. Store speed ▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated. ▷ DSC is actively controlling stability. Resume speed Maintaining/storing the current speed Press the button. Changing the speed Or Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel. The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control can be used. Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or inter‐ rupted, actively intervene by braking and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ Press the button. ▷ If active: press twice. ▷ If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted. Interrupting the system When active, press the button. Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ terrupted. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the speedometer, refer to page 128. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. Changing/maintaining speed The rocker switch can be pressed while the system is interrupted in order to maintain and store the current speed. The system is automatically interrupted if: ▷ The brakes are applied. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 127 Controls Driving comfort Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐ ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐ erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐ curring.◀ Displays in the instrument cluster Indicator lamp Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐ tem is switched on. Desired speed ▷ The marking lights up green: the system is active. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ ance point and holding it there accelerates or decelerates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator. After the rocker switch is released, the vehicle main‐ tains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the ve‐ hicle to accelerate more rapidly. Resuming the desired speed ▷ The marking lights up or‐ ange: the system has been interrupted. ▷ The marking does not light up: the system is switched off. Brief status display Selected desired speed. If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ tem requirements for operation are currently not met. PDC Park Distance Control The concept PDC supports you when parking. Objects that you are approaching slowly in front of or be‐ hind your vehicle are indicated with: ▷ Signal tones. ▷ Visual display. General information Press the button. The stored speed is reached and maintained. Measurements are made by ultrasound sen‐ sors in the bumpers. The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given: 128 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving comfort Controls ▷ By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. Switching on/off ▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m. Switching on automatically Notes Check the traffic situation as well PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐ tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ dent could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range. Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi‐ cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal tone.◀ Select transmission position R with the engine running. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary. Switching on/off manually Press the button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. Avoid driving quickly with PDC ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Avoid approaching an object quickly. In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the rearview camera, refer to page 131, can be switched on. Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet active. For technical reasons, the system may other‐ wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀ Switching on the rearview camera via the iDrive With PDC activated or Top View switched on: At a glance "Rear view camera" Button in the vehicle The rearview camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Display Signal tones PDC Park Distance Control When approaching an object, an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object. For example, if an object is de‐ tected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object be‐ comes, the shorter the intervals. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 129 Controls Driving comfort If objects are located both in front of and be‐ hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig‐ nal is sounded. System limits The intermittent tone is interrupted after ap‐ prox. 3 seconds: The detection of objects can reach the physi‐ cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g.: ▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that is detected by only one of the corner sen‐ sors. ▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches. ▷ If moving parallel to a wall. The signal tone is switched off: ▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐ ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm. ▷ When transmission position P is engaged. Volume The volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted, refer to user's manual for Navigation, Enter‐ tainment, Communication. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Display before a signal tone sounds. A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated. The range of the sensors is represented in the colors red, green and yellow. If the rearview camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display. To switch to PDC: 1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display. 2. Press the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Limits of ultrasonic measurement ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ With low objects. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected. False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range: ▷ In heavy rain. ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in ice. ▷ When sensors are covered in snow. ▷ On rough road surfaces. ▷ In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐ rages. ▷ In heavy exhaust. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights. The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐ ous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐ ger present, the system is again fully func‐ tional. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. 130 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving comfort The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded area on the Control Display. At a glance PDC has failed. Have the system checked. Button in the vehicle Controls To ensure full operability: ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. Surround View Rearview camera The concept Surround View comprises various camera as‐ sistance systems that help the driver when parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits and intersections. Camera ▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 131 ▷ Side View, refer to page 133. ▷ Top View, refer to page 135. Backup camera The concept The backup camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display. The camera lens is located in the handle of the trunk lid. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 219. Switching on/off Hints Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ dent could result from road users or objects lo‐ cated outside the picture area of the backup camera.◀ Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running. The backup camera image is displayed if the system was switched on via the iDrive. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 131 Controls Driving comfort Switching on/off manually Pathway lines Press the button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The PDC is shown on the Control Display. Switching on the rearview camera via the iDrive With PDC activated or Top View switched on: "Rear view camera" ▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐ age when in transmission position R. The rearview camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. ▷ Help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads. Display on the Control Display ▷ Are dependent on the current steering an‐ gle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements. Functional requirement ▷ The rearview camera is switched on. ▷ The trunk lid is fully closed. Turning circle lines Activating the assistance functions More than one assistance function can be ac‐ tive at the same time. ▷ Parking aid lines "Parking aid lines" Pathway and turning circle lines are dis‐ played. ▷ Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking" Spatially-shaped markings are displayed. ▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐ age. ▷ Show the course of the smallest possible turning circle on a level road. ▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed when the steering wheel is turned. 132 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving comfort Obstacle marking Controls General information 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning circle line. ▷ Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in the rearview camera image. Display settings Their colored steps match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance to the object shown. With the rearview camera switched on: Brightness 1. Select the symbol. Parking using pathway and turning circle lines 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning cir‐ cle lines lead to within the limits of the parking space. Contrast With the rearview camera switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. System limits Detection of objects High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the rearview camera. Side View The concept Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐ tively late from the driver's seat. To improve Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 133 Controls Driving comfort visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐ cle record the traffic situation on each side. Notes The images from both cameras are shown si‐ multaneously on the Control Display. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 219. Switching on/off Switching on/off manually Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle on blind driveways and intersections with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located out‐ side the picture area of the Side View cam‐ eras.◀ Press the button. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary. At a glance Display Button in the vehicle The traffic area to the left and right is displayed on the Control Display. Side View Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the position of the front of the vehicle. Cameras Brightness With the Side View switched on: 1. "Brightness" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. Contrast With the Side View switched on: Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐ ture the image. 1. The two camera lenses are located on the sides of the bumper. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. 134 "Contrast" Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving comfort System limits Controls Top View The cameras capture a maximum range of 330 ft/100 m. Cameras Top View The concept Top View assists you in parking and maneu‐ vering. The area around the doors and the road area around the vehicle are shown on the Con‐ trol Display for this purpose. General information The image is captured by two cameras integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the backup camera. The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo‐ cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐ ings. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and rear. Clean the lens, refer to page 219. In this way, obstacles up to the height of the exterior mirrors are detected early. Switching on/off Switching on automatically Notes Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ dent could result from road users or objects lo‐ cated outside the picture area of the cameras.◀ Select transmission position R with the engine running. The Top View and PDC images are displayed if the system is switched on via iDrive. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. At a glance Button in the vehicle Switch the system back on if necessary. Switching on/off manually Press the button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Top View is displayed. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 135 Controls Driving comfort Switching on the backup camera via the iDrive With Top View switched on: "Rear view camera" The backup camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Display Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. When the distance to an object is small, a red bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC display. Contrast With Top View switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. Displaying the turning circle and pathway lines ▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the space needed to the side of the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned all the way. ▷ The variable, green pathway line assists you in assessing the amount of space ac‐ tually needed to the side of the vehicle. The pathway line is dependent on the cur‐ rent steering angle and is continuously ad‐ justed with the steering wheel movement. "Parking aid lines" Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed. System limits Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐ uations: The display appears as soon as Top View is activated. ▷ With a door open. If the rearview camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display when reverse gear is selected. To switch to Top View: ▷ With an exterior mirror folded in. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display. ▷ With the trunk lid open. ▷ In poor light. A Check Control message is displayed in some of these situations. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Brightness With Top View switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. 136 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving comfort Parking assistant Controls Transporting loads Loads that extend beyond the perimeter of the vehicle are not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure. The concept Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐ dent occurring.◀ Curbs The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐ cle over or onto curbs. This system assists the driver in parking paral‐ lel to the road. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐ sible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure. When parking, also take note of the visual and acoustic information issued by the PDC and the parking assistant and react accordingly. A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 128. Hints Personal responsibility The parking assistant does not relieve the driver of responsibility for the vehicle dur‐ ing the parking procedure. Watch the parking space and parking proce‐ dure closely and intervene if necessary; other‐ wise, there is the danger of an accident.◀ Changes to the parking space Changes to the parking space after it was measured are not taken into account by the system. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐ dent occurring.◀ Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐ cle may become damaged.◀ An engine that has been switched off by the Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐ cally when the parking assistant is activated. Requirements For measuring parking spaces ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐ prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐ cles: 5 ft/1.5 m. Suitable parking space ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. ▷ Minimum length of the gap: own vehicle's length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m. ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. For parking procedure ▷ Closed doors. ▷ Parking brake released. ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be set. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 137 Controls Driving comfort At a glance Switching on with reverse gear Shift into reverse. Button in the vehicle The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. "Parking Assistant" Select the Activate: symbol in the Control Display. Switching off The system can be deactivated as follows: ▷ Press the button. ▷ Switch off the ignition. Parking assistant Display on the Control Display Ultrasound sensors Activating/deactivating the system Symbol Meaning Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not activated. The system is activated. The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the wheel arches. Status of the system To ensure full operability: ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. Switching on/off Switching on with the button Press the button. The LED lights up. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Parking assistant is activated automatically. 138 ▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of the vehicle representation. Parking as‐ sistant is activated and search for parking space active. ▷ Suitable parking spaces are displayed next to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the road as on the Control Display. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving comfort ▷ The parking procedure is ac‐ tive. Steering control has been seized. ▷ Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forwards slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ activated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray. Parking using the parking assistant Check the traffic situation as well Controls Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations: ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if he takes over steering. ▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the Control Display. ▷ If a turn signal is activated in the opposite direction to the desired side for parking. ▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. ▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces if necessary. Loud sounds outside and within the vehi‐ cle can drown out the signal tones of the park‐ ing assistant and PDC. ▷ If doors are open. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident.◀ ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly arise. 1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐ vate it if necessary. The status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to overcome, such as curbs. ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded. A Check Control message is displayed. Continuing 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ tinued if necessary. To achieve the best possible parking posi‐ tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel movement after the gear change when the vehicle is stationary. Follow the instructions on the Control Display to do this. System limits The end of the parking procedure is indi‐ cated on the Control Display. No parking assistance 3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec‐ essary. The parking assistant does not offer assis‐ tance in the following situations: ▷ In tight curves. Interrupting manually The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time: ▷ ▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on the Control Display. Press the button. Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ When sensors are dirty or iced over. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 139 Controls Driving comfort ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads. Head-up Display ▷ On slippery ground. The concept ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ When leaves or snow has collected in the parking space. Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physi‐ cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in the following circumstances: ▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure, such as fences. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected. The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking. This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed. In this way, the driver can get information with‐ out averting his or her eyes from the road. Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Display is influenced by: ▷ Certain sitting positions. ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐ play. ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. ▷ Wet roads. ▷ Unfavorable light conditions. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐ tings. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked. Switching on/off 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Head-Up Display" Display Overview ▷ Speed. ▷ Navigation system. ▷ Check Control messages. ▷ Collision warning. 140 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving comfort ▷ Speed limit detection. Setting the rotation ▷ Cruise control. 1. "Settings" ▷ Pedestrian warning. 2. "Head-Up Display" ▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster. 3. "Rotation" Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed. 4. Turn the controller. Selecting displays in the Head-up Display Controls The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Special windshield 1. "Settings" The windshield is part of the system. 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Displayed information" The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image. 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up Display. A film in the windshield prevents double im‐ ages from being displayed. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. Therefore, have the special windshield re‐ placed by a service center only. Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient light. The basic setting can be adjusted manually. 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller. When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐ ditionally influenced using the instrument light‐ ing. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Adjusting the height 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Height" 4. Turn the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 141 Controls Climate control Climate control Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Automatic climate control 1 Seat heating, left 50 6 Temperature 2 Vent settings 7 Seat heating, right 50 3 Rear window defroster 8 Cooling function 4 Air flow 9 Recirculated-air mode 5 AUTO program 10 Interior temperature sensor 142 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Climate control Climate control functions in detail Manual air distribution Turn the wheel to select the de‐ sired program or the desired in‐ termediate setting. ▷ Windows. ▷ Upper body region. ▷ ▷ Windows, upper body region, and foot‐ well. Footwell. Defrosting windows and removing condensation Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐ crease the air flow and temperature, and, if necessary, use the cooling function. Rear window defroster Press the button. The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time. Air flow, manual Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow. The air flow of the air conditioner may be re‐ duced automatically to save battery power. AUTO program Press the button. Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐ ture are controlled automatically. Depending on the selected temperature and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell. Controls The cooling function, refer to page 143, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ gram. Temperature Turn the wheel to set the de‐ sired temperature. The automatic climate control reaches this temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐ sary by increasing the cooling or heating out‐ put, and then keeps it constant. Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐ perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ just the set temperature. Cooling function The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running. Press the button. The air is cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again. Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally with the AUTO program. When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 166, devel‐ ops that exits underneath the vehicle. Recirculated-air mode You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle. Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode: Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 143 Controls Climate control ▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously. Switching on ▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐ nently blocked. Press any button except If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐ lated-air mode and increase the air volume, if necessary. Continuous recirculated-air mode The recirculated-air mode should not be used for an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐ ily.◀ ▷ Rear window defroster. ▷ Seat heating. Microfilter In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐ crofilter filters dust and pollen out of the air. This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 196, of your vehi‐ cle. Switching the system on/off Switching off Press the left button for the minimum speed. Automatic climate control with enhanced features 1 Seat heating, left 50 3 AUTO program 2 Temperature, left 4 Display 144 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Climate control Controls 5 Maximum cooling 11 Air flow, AUTO intensity 6 Temperature, right 12 Air distribution, left 7 Seat heating, right 50 13 Rear window defroster 8 Cooling function 9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ lated-air mode 14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep clear 10 Air distribution, right 15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐ sation Climate control functions in detail Intensity of the AUTO program Temperature With the AUTO program switched on, auto‐ matic control of the air flow and air distribution can be adjusted. Turn the wheel to set the de‐ sired temperature. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase the inten‐ sity. The automatic climate control reaches this temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐ sary by increasing the cooling or heating out‐ put, and then keeps it constant. Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐ perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ just the set temperature. AUTO program Press the button. Air volume, air distribution, and tem‐ perature are controlled automatically. Depending on the selected temperature, the AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell. The cooling function, refer to page 145, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ gram. At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ trols the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible. The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. Maximum cooling Press the button. The system is set to the lowest tem‐ perature, maximum air flow and air circulation mode. Air flows out of the vents for the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this. The air is cooled fastest when the engine is running. The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐ gram is active. Cooling function The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running. Press the button. The air is cooled and dehumidified and – depending on the temperature setting – warmed again. Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 145 Controls Climate control The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally with the AUTO program. ▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell: driver's side only. When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 166, devel‐ ops that exits underneath the vehicle. If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ sor. Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode Air flow, manual You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle. Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode: ▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. ▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shutoff auto‐ matically. ▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ manently blocked. If the windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the wind‐ shield. Continuous recirculated-air mode The recirculated-air mode should not be used for an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐ ily.◀ Manual air distribution Press the button repeatedly to select a program: ▷ Upper body region. To be able to manually adjust the air flow, switch off the AUTO program first. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow. The selected air flow is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power. Rear window defroster Press the button. The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time. Defrosting windows and removing condensation Press the button. Ice and condensation are quickly re‐ moved from the windshield and the front side windows. The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐ gram is active. If the windows are fogged over, you can also switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ sor. Switching the system on/off Switching off ▷ Upper body region and footwell. ▷ Footwell. Press the left button for the minimum speed. ▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only. 146 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Climate control Controls Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. Switching on Press any button except ▷ Rear window defroster. Ventilation in the rear ▷ Seat heating. Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐ crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 196, of your vehi‐ cle. ▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and closing of the vents, arrow 1. ▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐ row 2. Ventilation Toward blue: colder. Front ventilation Toward red: warmer. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 3. Parked-car ventilation The concept ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 1. ▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrows 2. ▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐ row 3. The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐ cle interior and lowers its temperature, if nec‐ essary. The system can be switched on and off at any external temperature, either directly or by us‐ ing two preset switch-on times. It remains switched on for 30 minutes. Toward blue: colder. Open the vents to allow air to flow out. Toward red: warmer. Operation can be performed via iDrive. Adjusting the ventilation Switching on/off directly ▷ Ventilation for cooling: 1. "Settings" Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐ rection, such as if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun. ▷ Draft-free ventilation: 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate comf. ventilation" The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes if the system is switched on. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 147 Controls Climate control Preselecting the switch-on time 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:" 4. Set the desired time. Activating the switch-on time 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2" The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐ vated. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reacti‐ vated. 148 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Interior equipment Controls Interior equipment Vehicle equipment Compatibility All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. If this symbol is printed on the packag‐ ing or in the instructions of the system to be controlled, the system is gener‐ ally compatible with the integrated universal remote control. If you have any questions, please contact: ▷ Your service center. ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet. Integrated universal remote control HomeLink is a registered trademark of John‐ son Controls, Inc. The concept Controls on the interior rearview mirror The integrated universal remote control can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The integrated universal remote con‐ trol replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans‐ mitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote con‐ trol. During programming During programming and before activat‐ ing a device using the integrated universal re‐ mote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects in the range of movement of the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀ Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security. ▷ LED, arrow 1. ▷ Buttons, arrow 2. ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐ quired for programming. Programming General information 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup: Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 149 Controls Interior equipment erases all programming of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. 3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ pends on the manual transmitter. 4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button to be program‐ med on the interior rearview mirror. The LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ gin flashing slowly. 5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. When the LED is flashing faster, this indicates that the but‐ ton on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ tween the interior rearview mirror and the hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distan‐ ces may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds. view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system features an alternating-code system. Flashing and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐ peat for approximately 20 seconds. For systems with an alternating-code system, the integrated universal remote control and the system also have to be synchronized. Please read the operating manual of the sys‐ tem being set up for information on how to synchronize the system. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐ ond person. To synchronize: 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐ mote-controlled system. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior rearview mirror as described. 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step. 4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this work step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once syn‐ chronization is complete, the programmed function will be carried out. Reprogramming individual buttons 6. To program other functions on other but‐ tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 1. Switch on the ignition. The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ rior rearview mirror buttons. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror button to be programmed. Special feature of the alternatingcode wireless system If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features an alternat‐ ing-code system. 3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter. Read the system's operating manual, or press the programmed button on the interior rear‐ 150 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Interior equipment 4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held trans‐ mitter. 5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐ rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐ idly. When the LED is flashing faster, this indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. The system can then be controlled by the button on the interior rearview mirror. Controls proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually. Digital compass At a glance If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds. Controls Before operation Before operating a system using the integrated universal remote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects within the range of movement of the remotecontrolled system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀ The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior rear‐ view mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior rear‐ view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐ nal is being transmitted. Deleting stored functions Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐ 1 Control button 2 Mirror display Mirror display The point of the compass is displayed in the mirror when driving straight. Operating concept Various functions can be called up by pressing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the con‐ trol button is pressed: ▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off. ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting. ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration. ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering setting. ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting. Setting the compass zones Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐ cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐ fer to World map with compass zones. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 151 Controls Interior equipment World map with magnetic zones Procedure Procedure 1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror. 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle. 2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ trol button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone correspond‐ ing to your location appears in the mirror. 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone. Calibrating the digital compass 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐ cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass. The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following: Left/right-hand steering ▷ The wrong point of the compass is dis‐ played. The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory. The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ pass is ready for use again after approximately 10 seconds. ▷ The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direction of travel. ▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐ played. 152 Setting the language Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control button again to switch between English "E" and German "O". Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Interior equipment Controls The setting is stored automatically after ap‐ proximately 10 seconds. Ashtray/cigarette lighter Ashtray Opening The lighter is located next to the ashtray. Push in the lighter. The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out. Raise cover. Connecting electrical devices Emptying Hints Take out the insert. Do not plug chargers into the socket Do not connect battery chargers to the factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the battery.◀ Lighter Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐ erwise, there is the danger of getting burned. Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.◀ Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ Sockets The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is run‐ ning or when the ignition is switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 153 Controls Interior equipment Front center console In the cargo area Raise the cap and remove the cover or ciga‐ rette lighter. The socket is located on the left side in the cargo area. In the front passenger footwell USB interface for data transfer The concept Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g.: ▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 34. The socket is located below the glove com‐ partment. Rear center console ▷ Music collection, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ cation. ▷ Importing trips, see user's manual for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment, Communication. Without Professional navigation system or TV: at a glance Remove the cover. The USB interface is located in the glove com‐ partment. 154 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Interior equipment With Professional navigation system or TV: at a glance Controls Hints Danger of pinching Before folding down the rear seat back‐ rests, ensure that the area of movement of the backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no one is located in the area of movement and that no one reaches into the area of movement of the rear seat backrests when the middle section is folded down. Otherwise, injury or damage may result.◀ The USB interface is located in the center arm‐ rest. Notes Observe the following when connecting: ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ nector into the USB interface. ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface. ▷ Do not connect USB hard drives. ▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices. Lock the rear seat backrests in position Before mounting child restraint fixing systems, place the seat backrest as far as pos‐ sible at an angle at which the child seat is rest‐ ing firmly against the backrest and all back‐ rests can be locked securely in place. Otherwise, the child seat will not be as stable as it should be, and there is increased danger of injury due to unexpected movement of the seat backrest.◀ Opening Through-loading system The concept The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrest. The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. If equipped with through-loading system: the rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40–20– 40. 1. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area to release the rear seat backrest. The sides can be folded down separately or to‐ gether. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 155 Controls Interior equipment 2. The unlocked backrest moves forward slightly. 3. Fold backrest forward. Closing Return the rear seat backrest to the upright seating position and engage it. Ensure that the lock is securely engaged Make sure that the lock engages prop‐ erly when folding back, otherwise transported cargo could enter the passenger compartment during braking or evasive maneuvers and en‐ danger the vehicle occupants.◀ To secure cargo, refer to page 168, with nets or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with lashing eyes. Folding down the middle section Reach into the recess and pull the middle sec‐ tion forward. 156 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Storage compartments Controls Storage compartments Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to page 158. ▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats. ▷ Storage compartment between the rear seats, refer to page 159 Glove compartment Front passenger side Notes No loose objects in the passenger com‐ partment Do not stow any objects in the passenger compartment without securing them; other‐ wise, they may present a danger to occupants for instance during braking and avoidance ma‐ neuvers.◀ Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐ board Note Close the glove compartment again im‐ mediately Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ cur during accidents.◀ Opening Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard. The mat materials could damage the dash‐ board.◀ Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail‐ able in the vehicle interior: Pull the handle. ▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, refer to page 158. The light in the glove compartment switches on. ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side, refer to page 157. The net in the glove compartment is provided for stowing the storage tray for the cupholder, refer to page 159. ▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage compartment, in front of the cupholders, refer to page 158. ▷ Storage compartment in the front center armrest, refer to page 158. Closing Fold up the cover. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 157 Controls Storage compartments Front storage compartment Locking The glove compartment can be locked with an integrated key to separately secure the trunk lid, refer to page 39, for example. This prevents access to the glove compart‐ ment and to the cargo area. After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐ mote control can be handed over, such as at a hotel, without the integrated key. Driver's side Raise the lid to open it. Note Close the glove compartment again im‐ mediately Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ cur during accidents.◀ Opening Compartments in the doors Do not stow any breakable objects Do not store any breakable objects, e. g. glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐ cident.◀ Center armrest Front A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats. Opening Pull the handle. Closing Fold up the cover. Fold the center armrest up. Repositioning Center armrest can be pushed forwards or backwards. It engages in the end positions. 158 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Storage compartments Connection for an external audio device . Description, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication. Storage compartment between the rear seats There is a storage compartment between the rear seats. Controls Storage tray for front cupholders The cupholder with the storage tray can be used for additional storage. To do this, place the storage tray in the cupholder. Only use the storage tray for small objects, such as keys or the remote control. When not in use, stow the storage tray in the glove compartment net. Insert the storage tray into the net so that the top surface faces up. Note the trapezoidal shape of the net and tray. Rear In the center armrest. Cupholders Hints Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀ Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐ tainers into the cupholders. This may result in damage.◀ Front Pull the center armrest forward at the strap. To open: press the button. To close: push both covers back in, one after the other. Pushing back the covers Push back the covers before folding up the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder could become damaged.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 159 Controls Storage compartments Clothes hooks Hooks/multi-function hook To fold up, press on the top or bottom edge. A multi-function hook is located on each side of the cargo area. The multi-function hooks can be loaded up to a max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg. Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐ er's vision.◀ No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐ neuvers.◀ Light and suitable objects only Only hang light bags or suitable objects from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger of objects flying about during braking and eva‐ sive maneuvers. Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has been appropriately secured.◀ Retaining strap Storage compartments in the cargo area Storage compartment A storage compartment is located on the left side. Located on the right side is a storage compart‐ ment for the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 198, and first aid kit, refer to page 211. Net Small objects can be stowed in the net on the left side. A retaining strap is available on the right side trim for fastening small objects. Lashing eyes in the cargo area To secure the cargo, refer to page 168, there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area. Floor net The floor net can also be used to Secure the load, refer to page 168, and to store small parts. Storage compartment under cargo floor panel Maximum load To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not exceed a maximum permitted load of 44 lbs/ 20 kg in the storage compartment under the cargo floor panel.◀ 160 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Storage compartments Controls Raise the cargo floor panel, arrow 1, and latch at top, if necessary, arrow 2. Partitioning the compartment The compartment can be divided using an at‐ tachable partition. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 161 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving tips This chapter provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving tips Things to remember when driving Things to remember when driving Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Breaking-in period General information Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other. The following instructions will help achieve a long vehicle life and good economy. Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐ prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during this break-in period. Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently. Following part replacement The same breaking in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life. Engine and differential Always obey the official speed limit. General driving notes Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Closing the trunk lid Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h. Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ stances. From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased. Drive with the trunk lid closed Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐ wise, in the event of an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers, passengers and other road users may be injured, and the vehicle may be damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐ ter the passenger compartment.◀ If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided: ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. Tires ▷ Greatly increase the blower speed. Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial breakingin period. ▷ Drive moderately. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km. 164 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Things to remember when driving Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the exhaust system. Driving tips Driving through water Drive though calm water only and only if it is not deeper than. 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐ sition mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐ ous personal injury as well as property dam‐ age. Braking safely Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.◀ Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐ ard feature. Mobile communication devices in the vehicle Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is neces‐ sary. Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ hicle It is advised that you do not use mobile com‐ munication devices, e.g., mobile phones, in‐ side the vehicle without connecting them di‐ rectly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle electronics and mobile communication devices can interfere with each other. In addi‐ tion, there is no assurance that the radiation generated during transmission will be dis‐ charged from the vehicle interior.◀ Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle. Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐ duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀ Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐ tions Do not exceed this water depth and walking speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.◀ The vehicle maintains steering responsive‐ ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode. Objects in the area around the pedals No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ing, for example.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 165 Driving tips Things to remember when driving Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet coated with road salt or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pres‐ sure on the brake pedal every few miles. Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it. Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐ fect that generally cannot be corrected. Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops that exits under‐ neath the vehicle. Traces of water under the vehicle like this are normal. Hills Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re‐ sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi‐ ciency. You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if necessary. Avoid load on the brakes Avoid placing excessive load on the brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐ sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.◀ Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist is un‐ available with the engine stopped.◀ Brake disc corrosion The corrosion on the brake discs and the con‐ tamination on the brake pads are furthered by: ▷ Low mileage. ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached. 166 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Loading Driving tips Loading Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. vehicle and unstable driving situations may result. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐ pacity. Hints Overloading the vehicle To avoid exceeding the approved carry‐ ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐ hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ No fluids in the trunk Make sure that fluids do not leak into the trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ aged.◀ For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs. 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐ gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐ cle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. Load Determining the load limit 1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐ hicle’s placard: ▷ The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 167 Driving tips Loading Stowing cargo ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo. ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐ ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests. ▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle. ▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow cargo. ▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests. Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo area floor. Securing cargo ▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐ taining straps, the floor net or draw straps. ▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps. Securing cargo Lashing eyes in the cargo area Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or draw straps to the lashing eyes in the cargo area. Securing cargo Always position and secure the cargo as described above; otherwise, it can endanger the car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving becomes necessary. To secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐ den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐ pants.◀ Floor net The floor net can also be used to Secure the load and to store small parts. Roof-mounted luggage rack Note Roof racks are available as special accessories. Securing Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack. 168 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Loading Driving tips Roof drip rail with flaps The anchorage points are located in the roof drip rail above the doors. Fold the cover outward. Loading Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof. Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐ fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐ sponse. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight. ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly. ▷ The roof load should not be too large in area. ▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom. ▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with ratchet straps. ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening path of the trunk lid. ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐ ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 169 Driving tips Saving fuel Saving fuel Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ sions. Close the windows and glass sunroof Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption. Tires General information Tires can affect fuel consumption values in various ways, for instance fuel consumption can be influenced by the size of the tires. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ ferent factors. Check the tire inflation pressure regularly The implementation of certain measures, driv‐ ing style and regular maintenance can have an influence on fuel consumption and on the envi‐ ronmental impact. Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐ tion pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Remove attached parts following use Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear. Drive away without delay Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature. Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐ cle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption. 170 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Saving fuel Avoid high engine speeds Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be‐ ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high engine speeds. When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐ stant speed. As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear. The gear shift indicator of your vehicle indi‐ cates the most fuel efficient gear. Use coasting conditions When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle roll. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion. Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop. If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running con‐ stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ onds of switching off the engine. Using this system can cause certain compo‐ nents of the vehicle to become worn prema‐ turely. Driving tips In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ mined by other factors, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors. Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic. Therefore, switch off these functions if they are not actually needed. Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life. Have the maintenance carried out by your service center. Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐ tem, refer to page 196. ECO PRO The concept ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐ gine control and comfort functions, e. g. the climate control output, are adjusted. In addition, context-sensitive instructions can be displayed that assist in driving in a manner that optimizes fuel consumption. The extension of the range that is achieved as a result can be displayed in the instrument cluster. At a glance The system includes the following EfficientDynamics functions and displays: Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 171 Driving tips Saving fuel ▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 172. ▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to page 173 ▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to page 172. Activating ECO PRO Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument cluster. By making a slight change to the set tempera‐ ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the passenger compartment, fuel consumption can be economized. The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior mirror heating are also reduced. The exterior mirror heating is made available when outside temperatures are very cold. ECO PRO potential Configuring ECO PRO The percentage of potential savings that can be achieved with the current configuration is displayed. Via the Driving Dynamics Control Display in the instrument cluster 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "Configure ECO PRO" ECO PRO bonus range 3. Configure the program. An extension of the range can be achieved by an adjusted driv‐ ing style. Via the iDrive 1. "Settings" This may be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument 2. "ECO PRO mode" cluster. Or The bonus range is shown in the range display. 1. "Settings" The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled. 2. "Driving mode" 3. "Configure ECO PRO" Configure the program. Driving style ECO PRO Tip ▷ "Tip at:": Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO Tip is to be displayed. ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning": A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO speed is exceeded. ECO PRO climate control "ECO PRO climate control" The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi‐ cient. 172 In the tachometer, a mark in the bar display in‐ dicates the current efficiency of the driving style. Mark in the CHARGE area, arrow 1: display for energy recovered by coasting or when braking. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Saving fuel Mark in the POWER area, arrow 2: display when accelerating. The efficiency of the driving style is shown by the color of the bar: ▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long as the mark moves within the blue range. ▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by backing off the accelerator pedal. The display switches to blue as soon as all conditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving are met. Driving tips Symbol Measure Automatic transmission: switch from M/S to D and avoid manual shift interventions. Manual shift transmission: follow shifting instructions. Manual shift transmission: engage neutral for engine stop. Indications on the Control Display ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction The arrow indicates that the driving style can be adjusted to be more fuel efficient by backing off the accelerator for instance. EfficientDynamics Information on fuel consumption and technol‐ ogy can be displayed during driving. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "EfficientDynamics" Note The driving style display and ECO PRO tips in the instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO display is activated. Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips: 1. "Settings" Displaying fuel consumption history The average fuel consumption can be dis‐ played within an adjustable time frame. Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐ lected time frame. Trip interruptions are represented below the bar on the time axis. 2. "Info display" "Consumption history" 3. "ECO PRO Info" ECO PRO tip - Symbols An additional symbol and a text instruction are displayed. Symbol Measure Adjusting fuel consumption history time frame Select the symbol. Resetting fuel consumption history For efficient driving style, back off the accelerator or delay accelerating to allow time to assess road condi‐ tions. 1. Open "Options". Reduce speed to the selected ECO PRO speed. The current efficiency can be displayed. 2. "Reset consumption history" Displaying EfficientDynamics info "EfficientDynamics info" The following systems are displayed: ▷ Automatic engine start-stop function. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 173 Driving tips Saving fuel ▷ Energy recovery. ▷ Climate control output. ▷ Coasting. ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐ sive current. ▷ Cruise control activated. Display ECO PRO tips "ECO PRO Tips" The setting is stored for the profile currently in use. Coasting Functional requirements In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐ prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if the following conditions are satisfied: ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated. The concept The system helps to conserve fuel. To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐ sion when transmission position D is engaged. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Transmis‐ sion position D remains engaged. This driving condition is referred to as coast‐ ing. As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is depressed, the engine is automatically coupled to the transmission again. Hints Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐ fer to page 171, driving mode. The function is available in a certain speed range. A forward-looking driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and supports the fuel-conserving effect of coast‐ ing. ▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐ tion D. ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating temperature. Display Display in the instrument cluster The mark in the bar display be‐ low the tachometer is backlit in blue and is located at the zero point. The tachometer approxi‐ mately indicates idle speed. The coasting point indicator is illuminated at the zero point during coasting. Indications on the Control Display The Coasting driving condition is displayed in EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode is active. Safety mode The function is not available if one of the fol‐ lowing conditions is satisfied. ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated. ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on steep uphill or downhill grades. 174 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Saving fuel Driving tips Functional requirement The function is only available in ECO PRO mode. Calling up ECO PRO Analyser Via the Driving Dynamics Control 1. Activate ECO PRO. Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2: driving condition Coasting. Displaying EfficientDynamics info 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "EfficientDynamics" 3. Select the symbol. Display Display on the Control Display 2. "EfficientDynamics" 3. "EfficientDynamics info" Deactivating the system manually The function can be deactivated in the Config‐ ure ECO PRO, refer to page 172, menu, e.g., to use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐ eling downhill. The setting is stored for the profile currently in use. ECO PRO Analyser The concept The system helps in this situation to develop an especially efficient driving style and to con‐ serve fuel. For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display. Using this indication, the individual driving style can be oriented toward conserving fuel. The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated. The range of the vehicle can be extended by an efficient driving style. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the Control Display. The display of the ECO PRO Analysers con‐ sists of a symbolized road route and a lookup table. The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐ ing style. The more efficient the driving style, the smoother the depicted road route be‐ comes, arrow 1. The table of values contains stars. The more efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐ cluded in the table and the faster the bonus range increases, arrow 2. If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐ cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of stars is displayed. To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO PRO tips are displayed during the drive. Tips about the energy saving driving style, Conserving fuel, refer to page 170. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 175 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Mobility In order to always ensure your mobility, you will find important information on operating fluids, wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside Assistance in the following. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Mobility Refueling Refueling Vehicle equipment 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. General information Refuel promptly 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap. Refuel no later than at a range of 30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not ensured and damage may occur.◀ Fuel cap Opening 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap. Closing 1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click. 2. Close the fuel filler flap. Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message is displayed if the cap is loose or missing.◀ Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐ ample. 178 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Refueling Mobility 1. Open the cover on the right side trim. To do this, turn the cap. 2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap. Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise fuel may escape, causing harm to the environ‐ ment and damaging the vehicle.◀ Handling fuels Obey safety regulations posted at the gas station.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 179 Mobility Fuel Fuel Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Fuel recommendation Gasoline For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ taining metal must not be used. Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐ out metallic additives. Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐ line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic converter and other components.◀ Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards: US: ASTM 4806–xx CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx xx: comply with the current standard in each case. Gasoline quality BMW recommends AKI 91. Minimum fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 89. Minimum fuel grade Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐ mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐ formance.◀ If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life. Fuel quality The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐ tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐ ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐ ronmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur. If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐ gine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail‐ ers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main‐ tenance.◀ Do not refuel with ethanol E85 Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this would damage the engine and fuel supply system.◀ 180 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Wheels and tires Mobility Wheels and tires Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Tire inflation pressure Safety information Pressure specifications The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 182, contains all pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐ perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐ proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands. This information can be obtained from your service center. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed. The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ sure influence the following: Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h ▷ The service life of the tires. For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 182, and adjust as necessary. ▷ Road safety. ▷ Driving comfort. Checking the pressure Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher. Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐ serve this precaution, you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.◀ These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar. Maximum permissible speed Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐ wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀ After correcting the tire inflation pressure: ▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. ▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 181 Mobility Wheels and tires Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tions in bar/PSI 428i, 428i xDrive Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC 2.4 / 35 - - 2.8 / 41 Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tions in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/50 R 17 94 V M +S A/S RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC Compact wheel T 135/80 R 17 102 M 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 Tire size 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/50 R 17 94 H M +S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 V M +S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M +S XL RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V M +S A/S RSC 2.4 / 35 225/40 R 19 93 V M +S XL A/S RSC 2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38 Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC 2.2 / 32 - - 2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC 2.2 / 32 - - 2.2 / 32 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 2.2 / 32 - - 2.2 / 32 Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC 182 2.2 / 32 - - 2.3 / 33 Pressure specifica‐ tions in bar/PSI 2.2 / 32 225/40 R 19 93 V M +S XL A/S RSC Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC 4.2 / 60 435i, 435i xDrive 225/45 R 18 91 V M +S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 225/50 R 17 94 H M +S RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M +S XL RSC Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Wheels and tires Mobility Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tions in bar/PSI Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 2.2 / 32 - 428i, 428i xDrive - 2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35 - - 2.6 / 38 Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC 2.6 / 38 - - 3.0 / 44 T 135/80 R 17 102 M Pressure specifica‐ tions in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/50 R 17 94 V M +S A/S RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC Compact wheel Tire size 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 2.4 / 35 - - 2.7 / 39 2.4 / 35 - - 2.7 / 39 2.4 / 35 - - 2.7 / 39 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M +S RSC Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 225/45 R 18 91 V M +S A/S RSC 4.2 / 60 225/40 R 19 93 V M +S XL A/S RSC Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Other‐ wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀ 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M +S XL RSC Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 183 Mobility Wheels and tires Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tions in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tions in bar/PSI Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC 2.6 / 38 - - 3.1 / 45 Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 2.5 / 36 - - 2.8 / 41 2.7 / 39 - - 2.8 / 41 2.9 /42 - - 3.4 / 49 Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC Compact wheel T 135/80 R 17 102 M Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60 Pressure specifica‐ tions in bar/PSI Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/50 R 17 94 V M +S A/S RSC Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC 435i, 435i xDrive Tire size Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC Compact wheel 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 T 135/80 R 17 102 M Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC Tire identification marks 225/50 R 17 94 H M +S RSC Tire size 225/45 R 18 91 V M 2.7 / 39 +S A/S RSC (Without high-speed 3.2 / 46 245/45 R 18 96 Y 245: nominal width in mm 45: aspect ratio in % tuning feature) R: radial tire code 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 18: rim diameter in inches 225/45 R 18 95 V M +S XL RSC Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires 96: load rating, not for ZR tires 225/40 R 19 93 V M +S XL A/S RSC 2.9 /42 3.2 / 46 Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC 2.5 / 36 - - 2.8 / 41 Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC 184 Speed letter T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Wheels and tires Tire Identification Number DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1013 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design 1013: tire age Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Tire age DOT … 1013: the tire was manufactured in the 10th week 2013. Recommendation Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every 6 years. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐ eral Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Mobility ing habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐ terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐ quired by law. Temperature grade for this tire Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart signifi‐ cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ The temperature grade for this tire is es‐ tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 185 Mobility Wheels and tires RSC – Run-flat tires Tire damage Run-flat tires, refer to page 188, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall. General information M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires. Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm. There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm. Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Notes Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐ ioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐ fects: Winter tires ▷ Unusual vibrations during driving. Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm. ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ dency to pull to the left or right. Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation. Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over curbs, road damage, or similar things. Minimum tread depth In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re‐ duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away; other‐ wise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If necessary, have the vehicle towed. Otherwise, tire damage can be life-threatening for vehicle occupants and other traffic partici‐ pants.◀ Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. 186 Repair of tire damage For safety reasons, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐ placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐ sult.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Wheels and tires Changing wheels and tires Mobility Recommended tire brands Mounting Information on mounting tires Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.◀ Wheel and tire combination Information on the correct wheel-tire combina‐ tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be obtained from your service center. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC. To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ figuration from a single manufacturer. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible. Approved wheels and tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐ mends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved for your particular vehicle model. For example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body con‐ tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐ uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐ mine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐ cle if they are mounted.◀ For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling. New tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial breakingin period. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km. Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ ommend the use of retreaded tires. Retreaded tires Possibly substantial variations in the de‐ sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.◀ Winter tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below +45 ℉/+7 ℃. Although so-called all-season M+S tires do provide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of per‐ formance as winter tires. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 187 Mobility Wheels and tires Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then display a corresponding sign in the field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center. Run-flat tires Label Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac‐ cidents can occur.◀ Run-flat tires If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own safety you should replace them only with the same kind. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you. Rotating wheels between axles The manufacturer of your vehicle advises against switching wheels between the front and rear axles. This can impair the handling characteristics. Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. RSC label on the tire sidewall. The wheels are composed of special rims and tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐ gree. The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a pressure loss. Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 102. Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 99. Changing run-flat tires For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you. Snow chains Fine-link snow chains Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle, classified as road-safe and recom‐ mended. Consult your service center for more informa‐ tion. Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size: 188 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Wheels and tires Mobility ▷ 205/60 R 16. ▷ 225/55 R 16. ▷ 225/50 R 17. ▷ 225/45 R 18. Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐ ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if necessary. Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 189 Mobility Engine compartment Engine compartment Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Important features in the engine compartment 1 Jump-starting, negative terminal 6 Oil filler neck 2 Vehicle identification number 7 Coolant reservoir 3 Washer fluid reservoir 4 Jump-starting, positive terminal 5 Engine compartment fuse box 190 The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and diesel engines is located on the opposite side of the engine compartment. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Engine compartment Mobility Hood Indicator/warning lamps Hints When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed. Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training. Closing the hood If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐ lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.◀ Never reach into the engine compart‐ ment Never reach into the intermediate spaces or gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is risk of injury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.◀ Fold down wiper arm Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms are against the windshield, or this may result in damage.◀ Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully. The hood must audibly engage on both sides. Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving, pull over im‐ mediately and close it securely.◀ Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Opening the hood 1. Pull lever in the interior: Engine is released, arrow 1. 2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again: Hood can be opened, arrow 2. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 191 Mobility Engine oil Engine oil Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. 3. "Engine oil level" Oil level display messages Different messages appear on the display de‐ pending on the oil level. Pay attention to these messages. If oil level is too low, immediately add 1 US quart/liter of oil. Take care not to add too much engine oil. General information The engine oil consumption is dependent on the driving style and driving conditions. When a sporty driving style is used, the engine oil consumption, for example, is clearly higher. Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling. Checking the oil level electronically Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐ age.◀ Detailed measurement The concept In the detailed measurement the oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ creased somewhat. Status display General information The concept A detailed measurement is only possible with certain engines. The oil level is monitored electronically during driving and shown on the Control Display. If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed. Requirements Depending on the previous displays, the status display is displayed when the engine is running or after the vehicle has been driven for at least 30 minutes. Requirements ▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral position, clutch and accelerator pedals not depressed. ▷ Automatic transmission: selector lever in transmission position N or P and accelera‐ tor not depressed. ▷ Vehicle is on a level road and the engine is running at operating temperature. Displaying the oil level 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 192 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Engine oil Mobility Performing a detailed measurement Oil types for refilling In order to perform a detailed measurement of the engine oil level: Hints No oil additives 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Measure engine oil level" 4. "Start measurement" The oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. Duration: approx. 1 minute. Adding engine oil Filler neck Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐ age.◀ Viscosity grades for engine oils When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.◀ The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Some types of oils in some cases are not avail‐ able in all countries. Approved oil types Gasoline engine BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30. BMW Longlife-01. When the indicator lights up in the instrument cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within the next 125 miles/200 km. Do not add too much engine oil When too much engine oil is added, im‐ mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀ Protect children Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐ dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.◀ BMW Longlife-01 FE. Additional information about the approved types of oils can be requested from the service center. Alternative oil types If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following specification can be added: Gasoline engine API SM or superior grade specification. Oil change An oil change should be carried out by your service center only. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 193 Mobility 194 Engine oil Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Coolant Mobility Coolant Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Adding engine oil 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any ex‐ cess pressure to dissipate, and then open it. General information Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may cause burns.◀ Suitable additives 3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill. Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.◀ 4. Turn the cap until there is an audible click. The arrows on the coolant reservoir and the cap must point towards one another. Coolant consists of water and additives. 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐ nated as soon as possible. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your vehicle. Ask your service cen‐ ter for suitable additives. Disposal Comply with the relevant environmen‐ tal protection regulations when dispos‐ ing of coolant and coolant additives. Coolant level Checking Marks are provided on the side of the coolant reservoir. Symbol Meaning Maximum Minimum 1. Let the engine cool. 2. The coolant level is correct when it is be‐ tween these two marks. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 195 Mobility Maintenance Maintenance Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. BMW Maintenance System The maintenance system directs you to re‐ quired maintenance measures and thereby supports you in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle. Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ count the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐ mines the maintenance requirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user profile. Detailed information on service requirements, refer to page 80, can be displayed on the Con‐ trol Display. Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle. Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐ mote control with which the vehicle was driven most recently. 196 Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐ tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐ count. If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ activated-charcoal filter. Service history Perform maintenance work at the service cen‐ ter and have them recorded in the vehicle data. The entries are like a service booklet of the documentation of regular maintenance. Displaying entered maintenance work on the Control Display, refer to page 81. Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐ formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ els for additional information on service re‐ quirements. Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐ ular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐ nance. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Maintenance Mobility Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis Position There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehi‐ cle emissions. Emissions ▷ The warning lamp lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. Canadian model: warning light indi‐ cates the engine symbol. ▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive mis‐ firing in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐ riod can seriously damage emission con‐ trol components, in particular the catalytic converter. Fuel cap The indicator lamp lights up. If the fuel cap is not properly tightened, the OBD system may conclude that fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tight‐ ened, the display should go out in a short time. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 197 Mobility Replacing components Replacing components Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Onboard vehicle tool kit 3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2. 4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the catch. 5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of removal until it locks in place. 6. Fold down the wipers. Folding down wipers before opening the hood The onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the right side in the cargo area in a storage com‐ partment. Open the cover. Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms with the wiper blades are against the windshield to prevent damage.◀ Lamp and bulb replacement Wiper blade replacement Hints Note Lamps and bulbs Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐ tion to vehicle safety. Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the windshield.◀ The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to the service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here. Replacing the wiper blades You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center. 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to page 68, the wiper arms. 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. 198 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Replacing components Mobility Headlamp glass Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.◀ Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system, you should always switch off the lights af‐ fected to prevent short circuits. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀ Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When driving with the light switched on, the conden‐ sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐ lamp glasses do not need to be changed. If the headlamps do not dim despite driving with the light switched on, increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the service center check this. Headlamp setting The headlamp adjustments can be affected by changing lamps and bulbs. Therefore after a change, have the headlamp setting checked and corrected by Service. Front lamps, bulb replacement Halogen headlamps Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.◀ Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover serve as the light source for controls, display elements and other equipment. These light-emitting diodes, which are related to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. 1 Parking lamps 2 High beams/headlamp flasher 3 Low beams 4 Turn signal 5 Daytime running lights Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 199 Mobility Replacing components Accessing the turn signals and low beams Low beams Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 198. 55-watt bulb, H7. 1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐ ets and remove the cover. 1. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐ move. 2. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it from the holder and remove. Turn signal 21-watt bulb, PY21W 1. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove. 3. Pull the connector off the bulb. 4. Attach the connector to the new bulb. 2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 5. First insert the bulb at the top with the strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly, arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into place. 3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ verse order of removal. 4. Attach the cover to the wheel house. 6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap. Make sure that the cap engages. 7. Attach the cover to the wheel house. 200 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Replacing components Accessing the daytime running lights, high beams/headlamp flasher and parking lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 198. Mobility High beams/headlamp flasher 55-watt bulb, H7. 1. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it from the holder and remove. 1. Open the hood, refer to page 191. 2. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐ move. 2. Pull the connector off the bulb. 3. Attach the connector to the new bulb. 4. First insert the bulb at the top with the strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly, arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into place. Parking lamps 6-watt bulb, H6W. 1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove. 5. Close the headlamp housing with the cap. Make sure that the cap engages. 2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 3. To insert the bulb and bulb holder, proceed in reverse order of removal. Make sure that the bulb holder snaps into place. 4. Close the headlamp housing with the cap. Make sure that the cap engages. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 201 Mobility Replacing components Daytime running lights Headlamps 24-watt bulb, PW24W. 1. If necessary, remove the high beam bulb connector. 2. Remove the bulb holder. 3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder. 1 Parking lamps / daytime running lights 2 Low beams/high beams/headlamp flasher 3 Turn signal Low beams and high beams are designed with xenon technology. 4. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal. During insertion, the bot‐ tom of the bulb holder must be facing downward. Make sure that the bulb holder snaps into place. The parking lamps and daylight running lights are made using LED technology. 5. Attach the high beam bulb connector. Turn signal 6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap. Make sure that the cap engages. Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 198. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Xenon headlamps Xenon headlamps Because of the long life of these bulbs, the likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps on and off frequently shortens their life. If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations. Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your BMW center. 202 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Replacing components 21-watt bulb, PY21W Mobility Headlamps 1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐ ets and remove the cover. 2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove. 1 Daytime running lights 2 Low beams/headlamp flasher 3 High beams 4 Parking lamps / daytime running lights 5 Turn signal 6 Side marker lights Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Front fog lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 198. 3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ verse order of removal. 5. Attach the cover to the wheel house. 35-watt bulb, H8. 1. Use the back side of the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1. Carefully raise the wheel house panel, ar‐ row 2. LED headlamps Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 198. With LED headlamps, all front lamps and side indicators are designed with LED technology. If an LED fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. 2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1. Turn the bulb, arrow 2. Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 203 Mobility Replacing components Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐ wise. Bulb replacement, exterior tail lamps Remove the bulb. General information Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 198. Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21W. Outer brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21WLL. The tail lamps feature LED technology. Con‐ tact your service center in the event of a mal‐ function. Use caution when replacing the bulb 3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector and screw on the wheel house panel. Turn signal in exterior mirror Use caution and proceed one step at a time when replacing the bulbs to prevent dam‐ age to the tail lamps or vehicle.◀ Removing the exterior tail lamp Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 198. 1. Open trunk lid. The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. 2. Loosen and remove the mounting pin of the cover, arrow 1, with the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit. Tail lamps, bulb replacement At a glance 3. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐ hicle tool kit to press in the latch, arrow 2, and remove the cover, arrow 3. 1 Turn signal 2 Reversing lamp 3 Inside brake lamp 4 Tail lamps 5 Outside brake lamp 204 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Replacing components 4. Loosen the two nuts with the screwdriver, arrows. Mobility 2. Press the defective bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐ teners. Installing the tail lamp 1. Connect the connecting line to the tail lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip. 5. Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp, ar‐ row 1, and carefully pull it backward and out, arrow 2. Use your free hand to hold it in place in order to prevent the tail lamp from coming loose suddenly. Make sure that the foam rubber sealing ring is on the centering pin. 6. Release the catch at the top on the con‐ nector of the connecting line and remove the connector from the bulb holder. Replacing the bulbs 1. Loosen the three fasteners, arrows 1, on the bulb holder and remove the bulb holder from the tail lamp, arrow 2. 2. Make sure that the foam rubber sealing ring is on the centering pin, arrow 2, and is not damaged. 3. Position and firmly press the outer part of the tail lamp onto the rubber mount, ar‐ row 1 and the inner part onto the centering component, arrow 2. Make sure that the tail lamp engages in the rubber mount. 4. Screw the tail lamp on with the two nuts. 5. Fit the cover in place and screw onto the fastener. Make sure that the tubular seal is not pinched. Lamps in the trunk lid General information Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 198. Reversing lamps: 21-watt bulb, P21W. Inner brake lamps: 21-watt bulb, H21W Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 205 Mobility Replacing components Accessing the lamps Installing the bulb holder 1. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐ hicle tool kit to loosen and completely re‐ move the four screws on the trim. 1. Slide the bulb holder onto the two guide pins, arrow 1. Insert the two contacts, ar‐ row 2, into the connections, arrow 3. 2. Carefully loosen the trim from the trunk lid, starting at the edge and working toward the area around the recessed grips. Make sure that the trim does not become stuck. 2. Press on the bulb holder. Make sure that the two exterior fasteners latch into place. 3. Swing the trim back onto the trunk lid and secure. 3. Carefully swing out the trim. Replacing the reversing lamp and inner brake lamp 1. Loosen the bottom fastener and hold the lamp holder on the guide rail, arrow 1. Tail lamp, license plate lamp and central brake lamp Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 198. These lamps are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Changing wheels Hints The vehicle equipment does not include a spare tire. 2. Loosen the top fastener, arrow 2, and re‐ move the lamp holder, arrow 3. 3. Press the defective bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 4. Insert the new bulb. 206 When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire does not need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire. The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Replacing components Jacking points for the vehicle jack Mobility Charging the battery Note Do not plug chargers into the socket Do not connect battery chargers to the factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the battery.◀ General information The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ cated at the positions shown. Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐ trolyte will last for the life of the battery. Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery. Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries only Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa‐ ble.◀ After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service cen‐ ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available and that any Check Control mes‐ sages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed. Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐ ciently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life. The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐ lowing cases: ▷ When making frequent short-distance drives. ▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐ riods, longer than a month. Starting aid terminals In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 212, in the engine compartment with the engine off. Power failure After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be reinitialized. Individual settings need to be reprogrammed: ▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐ tions again. ▷ Time: update. ▷ Date: update. ▷ Radio station: saving new, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication. ▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability of the navigation. Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy‐ cling center. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 207 Mobility Replacing components Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport. 3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3. 4. Press the four fasteners and remove the cover. Fuses Notes Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐ tute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐ sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀ Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box in the cargo area. Attaching the covers 1. When attaching the cover, make sure that all four fasteners are engaged. 2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and then thread it between the bars. In the engine compartment 1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen the three cover screws, arrow 1. 3. Press down on the holder and tighten the three screws. 2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2. In the cargo area Raise the cargo floor panel. 208 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Replacing components Mobility Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 209 Mobility Breakdown assistance Breakdown assistance Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Hints Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons, the Emergency Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐ able conditions.◀ Initiating an Emergency Request Hazard warning flashers 1. Press the cover briefly to open it. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up. The button is located in the center console. Intelligent Emergency Request Requirements ▷ The radio ready state is switched on. ▷ The Assist system is functional. ▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated. ▷ A ConnectedDrive contract is available. General information Only press the SOS button in an emergency. 210 ▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request was initiated. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab‐ lished. ▷ The LED flashes when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been estab‐ lished. When the emergency request is received at the BMW Response Center, the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum‐ stances. For this purpose, data that are used to de‐ termine the necessary rescue measures, such as the current position of the vehicle Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Breakdown assistance if it can be established, are transmitted to the BMW Response Center. Mobility Storage ▷ If the LED is flashing, but the BMW Re‐ sponse Center can no longer be heard via the speaker, you can nevertheless still be heard for the BMW Response Center. Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐ quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐ fication is not affected by pressing the SOS button. Warning triangle The first aid kit is located in the cargo area in a storage compartment. Roadside Assistance Service availability Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐ sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐ down. Roadside Assistance The warning triangle is located on the inside of the trunk lid. The Roadside Assistance phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to Roadside Assistance can be established di‐ rectly. To remove, loosen the bracket. Jump-starting First aid kit Notes Note Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly. If the battery is discharged, an engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐ bles with fully insulated clamp handles. To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐ dure. Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐ jury, always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 211 Mobility Breakdown assistance Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐ mation can be found on the battery. 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ cle. 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles. Bodywork contact between vehicles The body ground or a special nut acts as the battery negative terminal. Make sure that there is no contact be‐ tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐ wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀ Connecting the cables Starting aid terminals 1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid terminal. Connecting order Connect the jumper cables in the correct order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury from sparking.◀ 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐ tance. 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle. The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐ gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐ tive terminal. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started. Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in‐ creased idle speed. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not success‐ ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐ 212 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Breakdown assistance other attempt in order to allow the dis‐ charged battery to recharge. 3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐ verse order. Check the battery and recharge if necessary. Mobility Towing When the parking brake is blocked The parking brake cannot be released manually. Do not tow the vehicle with the parking brake blocked, or the vehicle can be damaged. Contact your service center.◀ Tow-starting and towing Automatic transmission: transporting your vehicle Note Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Therefore, contact a service center in the event of a breakdown. Do not have the vehicle towed Follow the towing instructions Follow all towing instructions; otherwise, vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀ ▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐ available. ▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn. Have your vehicle transported on a load‐ ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐ cur.◀ ▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force needs to be applied when braking and steering. Tow truck ▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐ quired. ▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle response. Tow truck Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.◀ Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for maneuvering the vehicle only. Manual transmission Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. Gearshift lever in neutral position. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 213 Mobility Breakdown assistance Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.◀ Towing other vehicles Attaching the tow rope correctly Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐ ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀ Tow fitting General information Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle re‐ sponse.◀ Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.◀ ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ pending on local regulations. ▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐ dow. The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. It is in the onboard vehicle tool kit located in a storage compart‐ ment on the right side in the cargo area. Open the cover. Tow fitting, information on use ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Tow bar ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.◀ ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during cornering. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset. Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, al‐ ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps. 214 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Breakdown assistance Mobility Screw thread Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge. Tow-starting Automatic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle. Due to the automatic transmission, the engine cannot be started by tow-starting. Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐ edied. Manual transmission If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 211. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐ alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐ gine is cold. 1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations. 2. Ignition, refer to page 61, on. 3. Engage third gear. 4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐ ately press on the clutch pedal again. 5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warning system. 6. Have the vehicle checked. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 215 Mobility Care Care Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle. Automatic car washes Hints Note the following: ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage. Car washes ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms. Hints ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle. Steam jets or high-pressure washers When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 ℉/60 ℃. ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 67, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐ vation. If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐ tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐ sively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage. ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐ tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to page 43. Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure washer.◀ Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.◀ Cleaning sensors/cameras with highpressure washers When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g., Park Distance Control, for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀ Regularly remove foreign items such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. 216 Guide rails in car washes Before driving into a car wash In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car wash, take the following steps: Manual transmission: 1. Drive into the car wash. 2. Shift to neutral. 3. Switch the engine off. 4. Switch on the ignition. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Care Automatic transmission: 1. Drive into the car wash. 2. Engage transmission position N. 3. Switch the engine off. In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐ played. Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash; otherwise, the transmission position P is engaged and damages can result.◀ To start the engine: Mobility can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur. Completely remove all residues on the win‐ dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear. Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using cleaning and care products from BMW, since these have been tested and approved. Car care and cleaning products 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ ping on the brake turns the ignition off. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in transmission position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle. Transmission position Transmission position P is engaged automati‐ cally: ▷ When the ignition is switched off. ▷ After approx. 15 minutes. Headlamps ▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or caustic cleansers. ▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to insects, with shampoo and wash off with water. ▷ Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an ice scraper. After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action Follow the instructions on the container. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐ cles. Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health.◀ Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐ fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐ quency and extent of your car care to these influences. Aggressive substances, such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed immediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored. Leather care Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 217 Mobility Care To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months. ularly when they have been exposed to road salt. Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible. Rubber components Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or reduced noise damping. Suitable care products are available from the service center. Fine wood parts Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth. If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita‐ ble interior cleaner. These include: Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously. Damage from Velcro® fasteners Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleansers. Plastic components ▷ Imitation leather surfaces. ▷ Headliner. ▷ Lamp lenses. ▷ Instrument cluster cover. Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀ ▷ Matte black spray-coated components. Caring for special components Do not soak the headliner. Light-alloy wheels ▷ Painted parts in the interior. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Lightly dampen the cloth with water. Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ turer's instructions. Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.◀ Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disk. Safety belts Chrome surfaces Chemical cleaning Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ 218 Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety. Do not clean chemically; this can destroy the webbing.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Care Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry. Carpets and floor mats No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Mobility Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.◀ Long-term vehicle storage Your service center can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months. Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ing, for example.◀ Floor mats can be removed from the passen‐ ger compartment for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only. Sensors/cameras To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner. Displays/screens Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber cloth. Cleaning displays Do not use chemical or household cleansers. Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit. Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐ ces or electrical components. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 219 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Reference This chapter contains the technical data and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need. Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Reference Technical data Technical data Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Dimensions Width, height 1 2 Vehicle height: 54.2 inches/1,377 mm with xDrive: 54.8 inches/1,392 mm Vehicle width without exterior mirrors: 71.8 inches/1,825 mm 222 3 Vehicle width with exterior mirrors: 79.4 in‐ ches/2,017 mm Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Technical data Reference Length, wheel base 1 Wheelbase: 110.6 inches/2,810 mm 2 Vehicle length: 182.6 inches/4,638 mm Smallest turning circle Dia.: 37.1 ft/11.3 m Dia. with xDrive: 38.7 ft/11.8 m Weights The values preceding the slash apply to vehi‐ cles with manual transmission; the values fol‐ lowing the slash apply to vehicles with auto‐ matic transmission. 428i Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,340/4,385 kg 1,969/1,989 Load lbs/kg 840/381 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,025/919 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,435/1,104 Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.7/445 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 223 Reference Technical data 435i Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,475/4,505 kg 2,030/2,043 Load lbs/kg 840/381 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,135/968 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,470/1,120 Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.7/445 lbs 4,540 kg 2,059 Load lbs/kg 840/381 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,160/980 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,455/1,114 Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.7/445 lbs 4,630/4,650 kg 2,100/2,109 Load lbs/kg 840/381 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,270/1,030 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,470/1,120 Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.7/445 428i xDrive Approved gross vehicle weight 435i xDrive Approved gross vehicle weight 224 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Technical data Reference Capacities US gal/liters Notes Fuel tank Gasoline: 15.8/60 Fuel quality, refer to page 180 Windshield and headlamp washer system 0.8/3 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 225 Reference Everything from A to Z Everything from A to Z Index A ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ tem 115 ACC, Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go 120 Acceleration Assistant, refer to Launch Control 71 Activated-charcoal filter 147 Active Blind Spot Detec‐ tion 111 Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go, ACC 120 Active Protection 112 Adaptive brake lights, refer to Brake force display 112 Adaptive Light Control 90 Additives, oil 193 Adjustments, seats/head re‐ straints 47 After washing vehicle 217 Airbags 94 Airbags, indicator/warning light 95 Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ culated-air mode 143, 146 Air, dehumidifying, refer to Cooling function 143 Air distribution, manual 143, 146 Air drying, refer to Cooling function 145 Air flow, air conditioner 143 Air flow, automatic climate control 146 Air pressure, tires 181 Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ tion 147 Alarm system 42 Alarm, unintentional 43 226 All around the center con‐ sole 14 All around the headliner 15 All around the steering wheel 12 All-season tires, refer to Win‐ ter tires 187 All-wheel-drive 116 Alternating-code hand-held transmitter 150 Alternative oil types 193 Antifreeze, washer fluid 68 Antilock Brake System, ABS 115 Anti-slip control, refer to DSC 115 Approved engine oils 193 Arrival time 85 Ash tray 153 Assistance, Roadside Assis‐ tance 211 Assistance when driving off 119 Assist system information, on Control Display 88 Attentiveness assistant 113 AUTO intensity 145 Automatic car wash 216 Automatic climate con‐ trol 142 Automatic climate control with enhanced features 144 Automatic Cruise Control with Stop & Go 120 Automatic Curb Monitor 55 Automatic deactivation, front passenger airbags 96 Automatic headlamp con‐ trol 90 Automatic locking 41 Automatic recirculated-air control 146 Automatic transmission with Steptronic 69 AUTO program, automatic cli‐ mate control 145 AUTO program, climate con‐ trol 143 AUTO program, intensity 145 Auto Start/Stop function 63 Average fuel consumption 85 Average speed 85 Axle loads, weights 223 B Backrest curvature, refer to Lumbar support 49 Backrest, width 49 Backup camera 131 Band-aids, refer to First aid kit 211 Bar for tow-starting/ towing 214 Battery replacement, vehicle battery 207 Battery replacement, vehicle remote control 32 Battery, vehicle 207 Belt carrier 52 Belts, safety belts 51 Beverage holder, cu‐ pholder 159 Blinds, sun protection 44 BMW Assist, see user's manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communi‐ cation BMW Homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Everything from A to Z BMW maintenance sys‐ tem 196 Bonus range, ECO PRO 172 Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐ pholder 159 Brake assistant 115 Brake discs, breaking in 164 Brake force display 112 Brake lamps, brake force dis‐ play 112 Brake lights, adaptive 112 Brake pads, breaking in 164 Braking, hints 165 Breakdown assis‐ tance 210, 211 Breaking in 164 Brightness of Control Dis‐ play 87 Bulb replacement 198 Bulb replacement, front 199 Bulb replacement, halogen headlamps 199 Bulb replacement, LED head‐ lamps 203 Bulb replacement, rear 204 Bulb replacement, xenon headlamps 202 Bulbs and lamps 198 Button, RES 123 Button, Start/Stop 61 Bypassing, refer to Jumpstarting 211 C California Proposition 65 Warning 7 Camera, care 219 Camera, rearview cam‐ era 131 Camera, Side View 134 Camera, Top View 135 Can holder, refer to Cu‐ pholder 159 Car battery 207 Car care products 217 Care, displays 219 Care, vehicle 217 Cargo 167 Cargo area, enlarging 155 Cargo area lid 38 Cargo area, storage compart‐ ments 160 Cargo, securing 168 Cargo straps, securing cargo 168 Car key, refer to Remote con‐ trol 32 Carpet, care 219 Car wash 216 Catalytic converter, refer to Hot exhaust system 165 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ ice 196 CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communi‐ cation Center armrest 158 Center console 14 Center-Lock, see button for central locking 35 Central locking system 35 Central screen, refer to Con‐ trol Display 16 Changes, technical, refer to Safety 7 Changing parts 198 Changing wheels 206 Changing wheels/tires 187 Check Control 76 Checking the oil level elec‐ tronically 192 Children, seating position 57 Children, transporting safely 57 Child restraint fixing sys‐ tem 57 Child restraint fixing system LATCH 58 Child restraint fixing systems, mounting 57 Reference Child seat, mounting 57 Child seats 57 Chrome parts, care 218 Cigarette lighter 153 Cleaning, displays 219 Climate control 142, 144 Clock 79 Closing/opening from in‐ side 38 Closing/opening via door lock 37 Closing/opening with remote control 36 Clothes hooks 160 Coasting 174 Coasting with engine decou‐ pled, coasting 174 Coasting with idling en‐ gine 174 Cockpit 12 Collision warning with City Braking function 103 Combination switch, refer to Turn signals 66 Combination switch, refer to Wiper system 66 Comfort Access 39 COMFORT program, Dy‐ namic Driving Control 118 Compartments in the doors 158 Compass 151 Computer 84 Condensation on win‐ dows 146 Condensation under the vehi‐ cle 166 Condition Based Service CBS 196 Configure driving mode 118 Confirmation signal 41 ConnectedDrive, see user's manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communi‐ cation ConnectedDrive Services Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 227 Reference Everything from A to Z Connecting electrical devi‐ ces 153 Control Display 16 Control Display, settings 86 Controller 16, 17 Control systems, driving sta‐ bility 115 Convenient opening 36 Coolant 195 Coolant temperature 79 Cooling function 143, 145 Cooling, maximum 145 Cooling system 195 Corrosion on brake discs 166 Cruise control 126 Cruise control, active with Stop & Go 120 Cruising range 79 Cupholder 159 Current fuel consumption 80 D Damage, tires 186 Damping control, dy‐ namic 116 Data, technical 222 Date 79 Daytime running lights 90 Defrosting, refer to defrosting the windows 143 Defrosting, refer to Windows, defrosting 146 Defrosting the windows 143 Dehumidifying, air 143 Destination distance 85 Digital clock 79 Digital compass 151 Dimensions 222 Dimmable exterior mirrors 55 Dimmable interior rearview mirror 55 Direction indicator, refer to Turn signals 66 Display, electronic, instru‐ ment cluster 75 228 Display in windshield 140 Display lighting, refer to In‐ strument lighting 92 Displays 73 Displays, cleaning 219 Disposal, coolant 195 Disposal, vehicle battery 207 Distance control, refer to PDC 128 Distance to destination 85 Divided screen view, split screen 21 Door lock, refer to Remote control 32 Drive-off assistant 119 Drive-off assistant, refer to DSC 115 Driver assistance, see Intelli‐ gent Safety 102 Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐ gent Safety 102 Driving experience switch 117 Driving instructions, breaking in 164 Driving mode 117 Driving notes, general 164 Driving stability control sys‐ tems 115 Driving tips 164 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol 115 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ trol 116 Dynamic Damping Con‐ trol 116 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 115 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 116 E ECO PRO 171 ECO PRO Analyser 175 ECO PRO, bonus range 172 ECO PRO display 171 ECO PRO driving mode 171 ECO PRO mode 171 ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐ struction 173 EfficientDynamics 173 Electronic displays, instru‐ ment cluster 75 Electronic Stability Program ESP, refer to DSC 115 Emergency detection, remote control 33 Emergency release, door lock 37 Emergency release, fuel filler flap 178 Emergency Request 210 Emergency service, refer to Roadside Assistance 211 Emergency start function, en‐ gine start 33 Emergency unlocking, trunk lid 39 Energy Control 80 Energy recovery 80 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 63 Engine, automatic switchoff 63 Engine compartment 190 Engine compartment, work‐ ing in 191 Engine coolant 195 Engine idling when driving, coasting 174 Engine oil 192 Engine oil, adding 193 Engine oil additives 193 Engine oil change 193 Engine oil filler neck 193 Engine oil temperature 78 Engine oil types, alterna‐ tive 193 Engine oil types, ap‐ proved 193 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Everything from A to Z Engine start during malfunc‐ tion 33 Engine start, jump-start‐ ing 211 Engine start, refer to Starting the engine 62 Engine stop 62 Engine temperature 78 Entering a car wash 216 Equipment, interior 149 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ gram, refer to DSC 115 Exchanging wheels/tires 187 Exhaust system 165 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 55 Exterior mirrors 54 External start 211 External temperature dis‐ play 79 External temperature warn‐ ing 79 Eyes for securing cargo 168 F Failure message, refer to Check Control 76 False alarm, refer to Uninten‐ tional alarm 43 Fan, refer to Air flow 143, 146 Fault displays, refer to Check Control 76 Filler neck for engine oil 193 Fine wood, care 218 First aid kit 211 Fitting for towing, refer to Tow fitting 214 Flat tire, changing wheels 206 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 100 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM 97 Flat tire, warning lamp 98, 101 Flooding 165 Floor carpet, care 219 Floor mats, care 219 Fogged up windows 143 Fold down the rear seat back‐ rest, see Though-loading system 155 Fold-out position, windshield wipers 68 Foot brake 165 Front airbags 94 Front fog lamps 92 Front fog lamps, front, bulb replacement 203 Front lamps 199 Front passenger airbags, au‐ tomatic deactivation 96 Front passenger airbags, indi‐ cator lamp 96 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 100 Fuel 180 Fuel cap 178 Fuel consumption, current 80 Fuel consumption, refer to Average fuel consump‐ tion 85 Fuel filler flap 178 Fuel gauge 78 Fuel quality 180 Fuel recommendation 180 Fuel, tank capacity 225 Fuse 208 G Garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 149 Gasoline 180 Gasoline quality 180 Gear change, automatic transmission 70 Gear shift indicator 81 General driving notes 164 Glass sunroof, powered 45 Glove compartment 157 Reference Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ proved 223 Gross weight, permissible for trailer towing 223 H Handbrake, refer to parking brake 65 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ nating code 150 Hazard warning flashers 210 Head airbags 94 Headlamp control, auto‐ matic 90 Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐ ture 89 Headlamp flasher 66 Headlamp glass 199 Headlamps 199 Headlamps, care 217 Headlamp washer system 66 Headliner 15 Head restraints 47 Head restraints, front 52 Head-up Display 140 Head-up Display, care 219 Heavy cargo, stowing 168 Height, vehicle 222 High-beam Assistant 91 High beams 66 High beams/low beams, refer to High-beam Assistant 91 Hills 166 Hill start assistant, refer to Drive-off assistant 119 Hints 6 Holder for beverages 159 Homepage 6 Hood 191 Horn 12 Hotel function, trunk lid 39 Hot exhaust system 165 HUD Head-up Display 140 Hydroplaning 165 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 229 Reference Everything from A to Z I Ice warning, refer to External temperature warning 79 Icy roads, refer to External temperature warning 79 Identification marks, tires 184 Identification number, refer to Important features in the en‐ gine compartment 190 iDrive 16 Ignition key, refer to Remote control 32 Ignition off 61 Ignition on 61 Indication of a flat tire 98, 101 Indicator and warning lamps 76 Individual air distribu‐ tion 143, 146 Individual settings, refer to Personal Profile 33 Inflation pressure, tires 181 Inflation pressure warning FTM, tires 100 Info display, refer to Com‐ puter 84 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM 98 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 101 Instrument cluster 73 Instrument cluster, electronic displays 75 Instrument lighting 92 Integrated key 32 Integrated universal remote control 149 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ quest 210 Intelligent Safety 102 Intensity, AUTO pro‐ gram 145 Interior equipment 149 Interior lamps 92 230 Interior lamps via remote con‐ trol 36 Interior motion sensor 43 Interior rearview mirror 55 Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ matic dimming feature 55 Interior rearview mirror, com‐ pass 151 Internet page 6 Interval display, service re‐ quirements 80 J Jacking points for the vehicle jack 207 Joystick, automatic transmis‐ sion 70 Jump-starting 211 K Key/remote control 32 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort Access 39 Key Memory, refer to Per‐ sonal Profile 33 Kickdown, automatic trans‐ mission 70 Knee airbag 94 L Lamp replacement 198 Lamp replacement, front 199 Lamp replacement, rear 204 Lamps 89 Lamps and bulbs 198 Lane departure warning 109 Lane margin, warning 109 Language on Control Dis‐ play 87 Lashing eyes, securing cargo 168 LATCH child restraint fixing system 58 Launch Control 71 Leather, care 217 LED light, bulb replace‐ ment 203 LEDs, light-emitting di‐ odes 199 Length, vehicle 223 Letters and numbers, enter‐ ing 22 Light alloy wheels, care 218 Light control 90 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 199 Lighter 153 Lighting 89 Lighting via remote con‐ trol 36 Light switch 89 Load 167 Loading 167 Lock, door 37 Locking/unlocking from in‐ side 38 Locking/unlocking via door lock 37 Locking/unlocking with re‐ mote control 36 Locking, automatic 41 Locking, central 35 Locking, settings 41 Low beams 89 Low beams, automatic, refer to High-beam Assistant 91 Lower back support 49 Luggage rack, refer to Roofmounted luggage rack 168 Lumbar support 49 M Maintenance 196 Maintenance require‐ ments 196 Maintenance, service require‐ ments 80 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Everything from A to Z Maintenance system, BMW 196 Malfunction displays, refer to Check Control 76 Manual air distribu‐ tion 143, 146 Manual air flow 143, 146 Manual mode, transmis‐ sion 70 Manual operation, door lock 37 Manual operation, exterior mirrors 55 Manual operation, fuel filler flap 178 Manual operation, Park Dis‐ tance Control PDC 129 Manual operation, rearview camera 132 Manual operation, Side View 134 Manual operation, Top View 135 Manual transmission 69 Marking on approved tires 187 Marking, run-flat tires 188 Master key, refer to Remote control 32 Maximum cooling 145 Maximum speed, display 82 Maximum speed, winter tires 188 Measure, units of 87 Medical kit 211 Memory, seat, mirror 53 Menu, EfficientDynamics 173 Menu in instrument clus‐ ter 84 Menus, operating, iDrive 16 Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ ing concept 18 Messages, refer to Check Control 76 Microfilter 144, 147 Minimum tread, tires 186 Mirror 54 Mirror memory 53 Mobile communication devi‐ ces in the vehicle 165 Modifications, technical, refer to Safety 7 Moisture in headlamp 199 Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ play 16 Mounting of child restraint fix‐ ing systems 57 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 12 Reference Navigation, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment and Communication Neck restraints, front, refer to Head restraints 52 Neutral cleaner, see wheel cleaner 218 New wheels and tires 187 No Passing Information 82 Nylon rope for tow-starting/ towing 214 Oil change interval, service requirements 80 Oil filler neck 193 Oil types, alternative 193 Oil types, approved 193 Old batteries, disposal 207 Onboard monitor, refer to Control Display 16 Onboard vehicle tool kit 198 Opening and closing 32 Opening and closing, from in‐ side 38 Opening and closing via door lock 37 Opening and closing, with re‐ mote control 36 Opening the trunk lid with notouch activation 40 Operating concept, iDrive 16 Optional equipment, standard equipment 6 Outside air, refer to Auto‐ matic recirculated-air con‐ trol 146 Overheating of engine, refer to Coolant temperature 79 Overtaking prohibitions 82 O P OBD Onboard Diagnosis 197 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ agnosis 197 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 133 Octane rating, refer to Gaso‐ line quality 180 Odometer 79 Office, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication Oil 192 Oil, adding 193 Oil additives 193 Oil change 193 Paint, vehicle 217 Parallel parking assistant 137 Park Distance Control PDC 128 Parked-car ventilation 147 Parked vehicle, condensa‐ tion 166 Parking aid, refer to PDC 128 Parking assistant 137 Parking brake 65 Parking lamps 89 Passenger side mirror, tilting downward 55 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ era 132 N Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 231 Reference Everything from A to Z PDC Park Distance Con‐ trol 128 Pedestrian warning with city braking function 107 Permissible axle load 223 Personal Profile 33 Pinch protection system, glass sunroof 45 Pinch protection system, win‐ dows 44 Plastic, care 218 Power failure 207 Power sunroof, glass 45 Power windows 43 Pressure, tire air pres‐ sure 181 Pressure warning FTM, tires 100 Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐ file 33 Programmable memory but‐ tons, iDrive 22 Protective function, glass sunroof 45 Protective function, win‐ dows 44 Push-and-turn switch, refer to Controller 16, 17 R Radiator fluid 195 Radio-operated key, refer to Remote control 32 Radio ready state 62 Radio, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication Rain sensor 67 Rear lamps 204 Rear socket 154 Rearview mirror 54 Rear window de‐ froster 143, 146 Recirculated-air filter 147 232 Recirculated-air mode 143, 146 Recommended tire brands 187 Refueling 178 Remaining range 79 Remote control/key 32 Remote control, malfunc‐ tion 36 Remote control, univer‐ sal 149 Replacement fuse 208 Replacing parts 198 Replacing wheels/tires 187 Reporting safety defects 9 RES button 123 Reserve warning, refer to Range 79 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 98 Retaining straps, securing cargo 168 Retreaded tires 187 Roadside parking lamps 90 Roller sunblinds 44 RON gasoline quality 180 Roof load capacity 223 Roof-mounted luggage rack 168 Rope for tow-starting/ towing 214 RSC Run Flat System Com‐ ponent, refer to Run-flat tires 188 Rubber components, care 218 Run-flat tires 188 S Safe braking 165 Safety 7 Safety belt reminder for driv‐ er's seat and front passen‐ ger seat 51 Safety belts 51 Safety belts, care 218 Safety Package, refer to Ac‐ tive Protection 112 Safety systems, airbags 94 Saving fuel 170 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐ play 16 Screwdriver 198 Screw thread for tow fit‐ ting 215 Seat and mirror memory 53 Seat belts, refer to Safety belts 51 Seat heating, front 50 Seating position for chil‐ dren 57 Seats 47 Selection list in instrument cluster 84 Selector lever, automatic transmission 70 Sensors, care 219 Service and warranty 7 Service history 81 Service requirements, Condi‐ tion Based Service CBS 196 Service requirements, dis‐ play 80 Service, Roadside Assis‐ tance 211 Services, ConnectedDrive Settings, locking/unlock‐ ing 41 Settings on Control Dis‐ play 86 Settings, storing for seat, mir‐ ror 53 Shifting, automatic transmis‐ sion 69 Shifting, manual transmis‐ sion 69 Shift paddles on steering wheel 71 Side airbags 94 Side View 133 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Everything from A to Z Signaling, horn 12 Signals when unlocking 41 Sitting safely 47 Size 222 Slide/tilt glass roof 45 Smallest turning circle 223 Snow chains 188 Socket 153 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ nostics 197 SOS button 210 Spare fuse 208 Specified engine oil types 193 Speed, average 85 Speed limit detection, on‐ board computer 85 Speed limiter, display 82 Speed Limit Information 82 Speed limit in the com‐ puter 85 Split screen 21 SPORT+ - program, Dynamic Driving Control 117 Sport automatic transmis‐ sion 71 Sport displays, torque dis‐ play, performance dis‐ play 86 SPORT program, Dynamic Driving Control 117 Sport program, transmis‐ sion 70 Sport steering, variable 117 Stability control systems 115 Start/stop, automatic func‐ tion 63 Start/Stop button 61 Start function during malfunc‐ tion 33 Starting the engine 62 Status display, tires 97 Status information, iDrive 20 Status of Owner's Manual 6 Steering wheel, adjusting 56 Steering wheel heating 56 Steptronic, automatic trans‐ mission 69 Stopping the engine 62 Storage compartments 157 Storage compartments, loca‐ tions 157 Storage, tires 188 Storing the vehicle 219 Summer tires, tread 186 Supplementary text mes‐ sage 77 Surround View 131 Switch for Dynamic Driv‐ ing 117 Switch-on times, parked-car ventilation 148 Switch, refer to Cockpit 12 Symbols 6 T Tachometer 78 Tailgate 38 Tailgate opening with notouch activation 40 Tailgate via remote con‐ trol 36 Tail lamps 204 Technical changes, refer to Safety 7 Technical data 222 Telephone, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment and Communication Temperature, automatic cli‐ mate control 143, 145 Temperature display, external temperature 79 Temperature, engine oil 78 Tempomat, refer to Active Cruise Control 120 Terminal, starting aid 212 Text message, supplemen‐ tary 77 Theft alarm system, refer to Alarm system 42 Reference Theft protection, refer to Central locking system 35 Thigh support 49 Through-loading system 155 Tilt alarm sensor 43 Time of arrival 85 Tire damage 186 Tire identification marks 184 Tire inflation pressure 181 Tire inflation pressure moni‐ tor, refer to FTM 100 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 97 Tires, changing 187 Tires, everything on wheels and tires 181 Tires, run-flat tires 188 Tire tread 186 Tone, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication Tools 198 Top View 135 Total vehicle weight 223 Touchpad 19 Tow fitting 214 Towing 213 Tow-starting 213 Tow truck 213 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor 97 Traction control 116 TRACTION program, Dy‐ namic Driving Control 116 Transmission, automatic 69 Transmission, manual 69 Transporting children safely 57 Tread, tires 186 Trip computer 86 Triple turn signal activa‐ tion 66 Trip odometer 79 Truck for tow-starting/ towing 213 Trunk lid 38 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 233 Reference Everything from A to Z Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐ ing 39 Trunk lid, hotel function 39 Trunk lid opening with notouch activation 40 Trunk lid via remote con‐ trol 36 Turning circle 223 Turning circle lines, rearview camera 132 Turn signals, operation 66 Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐ placement 204 U Unintentional alarm 43 Units of measure 87 Universal remote control 149 Unlock button, automatic transmission 70 Unlocking/locking from in‐ side 38 Unlocking/locking via door lock 37 Unlocking/locking with re‐ mote control 36 Unlocking, settings 41 Updates made after the edito‐ rial deadline 7 Upholstery care 218 USB interface 154 V Variable sport steering 117 Vehicle battery 207 Vehicle battery, replac‐ ing 207 Vehicle, breaking in 164 Vehicle care 217 Vehicle equipment 6 Vehicle identification number, refer to Identification num‐ ber in the engine compart‐ ment 190 234 Vehicle jack 207 Vehicle paint 217 Vehicle storage 219 Vehicle wash 216 Ventilation 147 Ventilation, refer to Parkedcar ventilation 147 Voice activation system 24 W Warning indicators 76 Warning lamps 76 Warning messages, refer to Check Control 76 Warning triangle 211 Washer fluid 68 Washer fluid reservoir, ca‐ pacity 225 Washer nozzles, wind‐ shield 68 Washer system 66 Washing, vehicle 216 Water on roads 165 Weights 223 Welcome lamps 89 Wheel base, vehicle 223 Wheel cleaner 218 Wheels, changing 187 Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 181 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 100 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM 97 Width, vehicle 222 Window defroster, rear 143, 146 Windows, powered 43 Windshield washer fluid 68 Windshield washer noz‐ zles 68 Windshield washer sys‐ tem 66 Windshield wiper 66 Windshield wipers, fold-out position 68 Winter storage, care 219 Winter tires, suitable tires 187 Winter tires, tread 186 Wiper blades, replacing 198 Wiper fluid 68 Wiper system 66 Wood, care 218 Word match concept, naviga‐ tion 23 Wrench 198 X xDrive 116 Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐ placement 202 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 More about BMW The Ultimate Driving Machine 0140 2 909 827 ue bmwusa.com *BL290982700H* Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13